MODX Reference Manual [20MB] En Rm A0
User Manual: Pdf [20MB] Manual Library - Yamaha - United States
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 217
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
MUSIC SYNTHESIZER Reference Manual Contents Using the MODX Manuals..........................................2 Reference Basic Structure Display (touch panel) configuration ...................... 25 3 25 Performance Play (Home)....................................... 27 Functional Blocks ......................................................3 Motion Control......................................................... 33 Tone Generator Block................................................4 Mixing ....................................................................... 50 Tone Generator block ...................................................... 4 Scene........................................................................ 55 A/D Input Block ........................................................10 Play/Rec ................................................................... 60 Sequencer Block ......................................................10 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit........................................ 66 Arpeggio Block.........................................................11 Element Common Edit (Common) .................................66 Arpeggio categories....................................................... 11 Element Edit (Element) ................................................107 Sub categories............................................................... 11 Element All (All Element) .............................................130 Arpeggio Type Name..................................................... 12 Drum Part Edit ....................................................... 133 Arpeggio-related settings............................................... 13 Arpeggio playback types................................................ 14 Creating an Arpeggio..................................................... 16 Motion Sequencer Block .........................................17 Effect Block ..............................................................19 Effect structure............................................................... 19 Effect connection ........................................................... 20 About the Vocoder Effect............................................... 20 Envelope Follower Block.........................................21 Controller Block .......................................................22 Key Common Edit (Common) ......................................133 Key Edit (Key) ..............................................................140 Normal Part (FM-X) Edit ........................................ 145 Operator Common Edit (Common) ..............................145 Operator Edit (Operator) ..............................................155 Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio)................ 159 Category Search.................................................... 176 Performance Category Search.....................................176 Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search)......180 Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search).........182 Keyboard ....................................................................... 22 Rhythm Pattern ............................................................184 Pitch Bend wheel ........................................................... 22 Utility ...................................................................... 187 Modulation wheel........................................................... 22 Assignable Switches...................................................... 22 Knobs and Control Sliders ............................................. 22 Super Knob.................................................................... 22 Internal Memory .......................................................23 Live Set................................................................... 212 Live Set ........................................................................212 Live Set Edit (Edit) .......................................................213 Live Set Register (Register) .........................................216 Connecting an iPhone or iPad ............................. 217 EN Using the MODX Manuals Your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 synthesizer comes with four different reference guides—the Owner’s Manual, the Reference Manual (this document), the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List. While the Owner’s Manual is packaged together with the synthesizer as a hardcopy booklet, this Reference Manual, the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List are available for download from our web page as PDF documents. Owner’s Manual (hardcopy booklet) Describes how to set up your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 and how to perform basic operations. • This manual explains the following operations. • Selecting Performances • Playing the Keyboard • Creating Your Own Live Sets • Editing the Settings • Recording and Playback • Using as a Master Keyboard • Connecting a Microphone or Audio Equipment • Making Global System Settings • Connecting External MIDI Instruments • Using a Connected Computer • Saving/Loading Data Reference Manual (this PDF document) Describes the internal design of your MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 and the various parameters that can be adjusted and set. Synthesizer Parameter Manual (PDF document) Explains the Part parameters, effect types, effect parameters, and MIDI messages that are used for synthesizers incorporating the Yamaha AWM2 and FM-X tone generators. Read the Owner’s Manual and Reference Manual first and then use this parameter manual, if necessary, to learn more about parameters and terms that relate to Yamaha synthesizers. Data List (PDF document) Provides lists such as the Waveform List, Performance List, Effect Type List, Arpeggio Type List, as well as reference materials such as the MIDI Implementation Chart. Using the Reference Manual Select the display name tab • Using the display name tabs along the upper part of each page from the Reference section, you can jump to the page for parameter explanations of the corresponding display. • You can click on any page number from the Table of Contents or within descriptive text to jump to the corresponding page. • You can also click on desired items and topics you want to refer to in the “Bookmarks” index to the left of the main window, and jump to the corresponding page. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the index if it is not displayed.) • If you want to find information on a specific topic, function or feature, select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” menu and enter a key word to locate the related information anywhere in the document. ® ® NOTE The most-recent version of Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the following web page. http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/ Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Select the function Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements. An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays: Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display, for editing individual Elements. Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Element Common Edit (Common) Zone Transmit Effect Routing Part Settings Ins A Ins B EQ General Ins Assign From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] Æ [EDIT] Æ Part selection Æ Element [Common] Æ [Part Settings] Æ [General] Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Part Category Main (Part Main Category) Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category) Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Part Name Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Volume (Part Volume) Determines the output level of the selected Part. Settings: 0–127 Copy or Exchange Elements Pan NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used. Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part. Settings: L63–C–R63 MODX Reference Manual 66 Information • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. • iPhone, iPad, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MODX Reference Manual 2 Basic Structure Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Functional Blocks Arpeggio block The MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 system consists of eight main functional blocks: Tone Generator, A/D Input, Sequencer, Motion Sequencer, Arpeggio, Controller, Effect, and Envelope Follower. Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller Block (page 22) Motion Sequencer Block (page 17) Keyboard Controllers (such as Super Knob) Control Message Flow Controller block Audio Signal Flow Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Tone Generator (page 4) Motion Control Effects (page 19) AWM2 Tone Generator FM-X Tone Generator 16 Parts Performances Mixing System Effects 13 Insertion Effects Element EQ Part EQ Master Effect Master EQ Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Sequencer Block (page 10) Arpeggio Block (page 11) 16-Track MIDI Sequencer Songs Arpeggio Playback x 8 Preset Arpeggio User Arpeggio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Envelope Follower Block (page 21) A/D Input (page 10) Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection MIDI OUT MIDI IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT [USB TO HOST] MIDI [OUT] [USB TO HOST] MIDI [IN] [USB TO HOST] A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] [USB TO HOST] OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] Computer External MIDI equipment Computer Microphone, Computer audio equipment, etc. Powered speakers, etc. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) This instrument is equipped with an AWM2 tone generator block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters—envelope generator, filter, modulation, and others—can be applied. MODX Reference Manual 3 Basic Structure FM-X This synthesizer also features an FM-X tone generator, in addition to the AWM2 block. The abbreviation “FM” of FM-X stands for “frequency modulation,” which is a special tone generation system that uses the frequency of one waveform to modulate another waveform, in order to produce a completely new one. In this synthesizer, there are eight FM Operators and a full 88 different Algorithm types. By changing the operator combination patterns, controlling the modulation with other parameters such as levels and envelopes, and using high-quality filters, effects, and EQ commonly with AWM2, you can create richly textured sounds that change in a highly complex fashion. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Tone Generator Block The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages received from the Sequencer block, Controller block, Arpeggio block and from the external MIDI instrument. The MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and the instrument is capable of simultaneously playing sixteen separate Parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteenchannel limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The tone generator block of this instrument can handle MIDI messages over Port 1. Tone Generator block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Performances A Performance is a single set of sounds consisting of multiple Parts. You can change sounds as desired by selecting the appropriate Performance. Each Performance has two types of parameters; parameters unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts. You can edit the entire Performance in the Common/Audio Edit display (page 159). Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set Part structure of a Performance iPhone/iPad connection A Performance consists of 16 Parts and you can create Performances (in which multiple Parts or Parts are combined—in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard. Parts Internally, there are three Part types: Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts. Normal Parts (AWM2) are mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds that can be played over the full range of the keyboard. Normal Parts (FM-X) are also mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds, using FM synthesis. Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes. A Normal Part (AWM2) can consist of up to eight Elements, a Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight Operators, and a Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys. An Element/Operator/Drum Key is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. By combining multiple Elements/ Operators/Keys, Parts can be created to produce even more realistic sounds or various richly textured types of sound. Each Part is created by editing parameters unique to each (Element Edit parameters/ Operator Edit parameters/Key Edit parameters) and parameters common to all the Elements/Operators/ Keys (Element Common Edit, Operator Common Edit, and Key Common Edit parameters.) NOTE For instructions on editing a Normal Part (AWM2), see page 66. For instructions on editing a Normal Part (FM-X), see page 145. For instructions on editing a Drum Part, see page 133. MODX Reference Manual 4 Basic Structure Normal Parts (AWM2), Normal Parts (FM-X), and Drum Parts Functional blocks Normal Parts (AWM2) Tone Generator block These Parts are played conventionally from the Element 2 Element 4 Element 6 keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key, Velocity generated by AWM2. A Normal Part consists of up to eight Elements. Depending on the settings in the Part Element 1 Element 3 Element 5 Edit, these Elements are sounded simultaneously, or different Elements are sounded according to the note range, velocity range and the XA (Expanded Articulation) settings (page 6). The illustration shows an example of a Normal Part (AWM2). Since the six Elements here are distributed across both the note range of the keyboard and the velocity range, a different Element sounds depending on which note you play and how strongly you play it. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In the note distribution, Elements 1 and 2 sound in the lower range of the keyboard, Elements 3 and 4 sound in the middle range, and Elements 5 and 6 sound in the higher range. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In a practical example of this in use, a piano Part could be composed of six different samples. Elements 1, 3 and 5 would be the sounds of the piano played softly, over the respective note ranges, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 would be strongly played sounds, for each respective note range. Actually, this instrument is even more flexible than this, since it allows up to eight independent Elements. A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Normal Parts (FM-X) Play/Rec These Parts are also played conventionally from the keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key, generated by FM synthesis. The sound for a Normal Part (FM-X) is created by modulating a frequency of a fundamental waveform with another waveform. An operator that generates a fundamental waveform is a “carrier,” and an operator that modulates these waveforms is a “modulator.” The combination of a number of Operators is called “Algorithm.” When the waveform output from the Operator is a simple sine wave, no harmonics are included other than the fundamental tone. However, you can create harmonics by modulating the waveform with other Operators. How harmonics can be created depends on the Modulators’ output levels and the frequency rates of Carriers and Modulators. On the other hand, the basic pitch is determined by Carrier’s frequency, and the output level is determined by the Carrier’s output level. The figure described below shows a basic way to create FM sound by using an analog synthesizer. Modulator OP Frequency ratio of the Modulator and the Carrier determines the base waveform including specific harmonics by the Oscillator. Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Modulator output level determines the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter. Modulation Modulator envelope determines the Filter envelope. Carrier OP Carrier frequency determines the pitch of the Oscillator. Carrier output level determines the volume by using the amplifier. Carrier envelope determines the amplifier envelope. Although the figure described above shows waveforms which are generated by two operators, the MODX has eight Operators. The combination of a number of Operators is called an “Algorithm” and this synthesizer has parameters for setting the Algorithm. Drum Parts Drum Parts are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard (C0 to C6). Unlike Elements, a Drum C0 C1 key is equivalent to the corresponding note, Individual drum meaning that you cannot change its range. sounds (different for Drum or percussion sounds are assigned to each Drum Key. You can create various types of each key) Drum Parts by changing the drum or percussion sound assigned to each key and edit the parameters such as pitch and EG. MODX Reference Manual C6 5 Expanded Articulation (XA) Basic Structure Functional blocks Expanded Articulation (XA) is a tone generation system that provides greater performance flexibility and acoustic realism. This feature allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural performance techniques—such as legato and staccato—and provides other unique modes for random and alternate sound changes as you play. Tone Generator block Realistic legato performance Motion Sequencer block This instrument more accurately reproduces a legato effect by allowing specific Elements to be sounded when playing legato and other Elements to be played normally (with the XA Control parameter settings “Normal” and “Legato”). Effect block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Envelope Follower block Controller block Authentic note release sound Internal Memory The MODX reproduces these special, characteristic sounds by setting the XA Control parameter of certain Elements to “Key Off.” Subtle sound variations for each note played The MODX more accurately reproduces these subtle sound variations by using the XA Control parameter settings “Cycle” and “Random.” Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Switching among different sounds to recreate the natural performance on an acoustic instrument Acoustic instruments have their own unique characteristics—even specific, unique sounds that are produced only at certain times in a performance. These include the flutter tonguing on a flute or the playing of high harmonics on an acoustic guitar. The MODX recreates these by allowing you to switch between the sounds while you play—using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] buttons and the XA Control parameter settings, “A.SW1 On,” “A.SW2 On” and “A.SW Off.” NOTE You can turn the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button on or off also by transmitting the Control Change number specified in the Common/Audio Edit display ([Control] [Control Number]) (page 167) from an external device. Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search New sounds and new styles of playing The highly versatile functions above can be applied effectively not only to acoustic sounds but also to synthesizer and electronic Parts as well. The XA feature opens up enormous potential for realizing authentic sounds, performing expressively and coming up with creative new styles of playing. Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Motion Control System The Motion Control System is a completely new feature for variably controlling Motions (rhythmical, multidimensional sound changes) in real time. This amazingly powerful feature dramatically and dynamically alters the sounds of the instrument in new, never-heard-before ways—changing texturally, rhythmically with the beats, providing cool, colorful lighting effects, and responding expressively to your creative passion. The Motion Control System has three main functions: Super Knob: For creating multi-dimensional sonic changes, and enhancing those changes with colorful, continually shifting lighting changes. Multiple parameters can be controlled simultaneously. Motion Sequencer: For continually variable sound changes. The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically change sounds by operating Parameters depending on sequences created in advance. It provides real time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, Arpeggio, or the rhythm of external connected devices. Envelope Follower: Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the volume envelope of the input signal waveform and modifying sounds dynamically. NOTE Envelope Follower can be controlled not only by the audio signal from an external device, but also by the output of all Parts. MODX Reference Manual 6 Basic Structure Motion Control System Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block • Continuous control of Motion changes A/D Input block Sequencer block • Switch between Motions Arpeggio block • Trigger, Hold Motion Sequencer block Effect block Control the Motion Sequencer in real time AUDIO • Part 1–16 • A/D Input Part Envelope Follower Controller block • Audio Beat Sync • External MIDI • Internal Tempo BEAT Envelope Follower block Internal Memory Super Knob Motion Sequencer Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Play/Rec Automation Rhythmic change Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Multi-dimensional sonic change Tone generator Effect For details on the Motion Control, refer to the website below: http://www.yamaha.com/modx/ MODX Reference Manual 7 Basic Structure Elements, Drum Keys and Operators Functional blocks Elements/Drum Keys/Operators are the smallest “building blocks” in the MODX that comprise a Part. These small sound units can be built, enhanced and processed by a variety of traditional synthesizer parameters, such as Pitch EG, Filter EG, Amplitude EG, and LFO (shown below). Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block LFO Motion Sequencer block Low Frequency Oscillator Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory OSC (Oscillator) Waveform (AWM2) PITCH FILTER AMP Changes the tonal quality of the sound. Controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound. Reference Display (touch panel) config. Controls the pitch of the sound. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Pitch EG Filter EG Amplitude EG (Pitch Envelope Generator) (Filter Envelope Generator) (Amplitude Envelope Generator) Oscillator This unit allows you to assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element/Operator/Key. Oscillator-related parameters can be set as follows. • For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] (page 107, page 140) • For Normal Parts (FM-X) [EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Form/Freq] (page 155) Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Pitch This unit allows you to control how the pitch changes over time. Pitch-related parameters can be set as follows. • For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] (page 107, page 140) • For Normal Parts (FM-X) [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] (page 148) Parameters related to Pitch EG can be set as follows. • For Normal Parts (AWM2) [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Pitch EG] (page 111) • For Normal Parts (FM-X) [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] (page 148) Filter This unit modifies the tone of the sound by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound. Also, by setting the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator), you can control how the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter changes over time. Parameters related to Filter and Filter EG can be set as follows. • For Normal Parts (AWM2) and Drum Parts [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] (page 113, page 142) • For Normal Parts (FM-X) [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] (page 148) MODX Reference Manual 8 Amplitude This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the Element/Drum Key/Operator. Parameters related to Amplitude and Amplitude EG can be set as follows. • For Normal Parts (AWM2) [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] (page 121) • For Drum Parts [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Level/Pan] (page 143) • For Normal Parts (FM-X) [EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Level] (page 157) Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency. These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element/Operator to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. There are two LFO types: Part LFO, which is common to all Elements/ Operators, and Element LFO, which is unique for each Element. Parameters related to Part LFO can be set as follows. • For Normal Parts (AWM2) [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control] [Part LFO] (page 96) • For Normal Parts (FM-X) [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Mod/Control] [Part LFO] or [2nd LFO] (page 152) Parameters related to Element LFO can be set as follows. [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Element LFO] (page 126) Controller block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Maximum Polyphony Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously from the internal tone generator of the instrument. The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 128 for AWM2 and 64 for FM-X. When the internal tone generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played notes are cut off. Keep in mind that this may be especially noticeable with Parts not having decay. Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of Elements/Drum Keys used, not the number of Parts. When Normal Parts (AWM2) that include up to eight Elements are used, the maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 128. Common/Audio Edit MODX Reference Manual Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection 9 A/D Input Block This block handles the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Various parameters such as volume, pan, and effect can be set for the audio signal and the sound is output together with other Parts. An Insertion Effect, the System Effects, the Master Effects, and the Master EQ can be applied to the audio signal input via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Parameters related to the A/D Input block can be set as follows. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Mixing] (page 50) [EDIT] Part [Common] [Audio In] [Mixing] (page 161) The Effect which is applied to the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be set as follows. [EDIT] Part [Common] [Audio In] [Routing] (page 162) The gain of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks can be adjusted via the A/D INPUT [GAIN] knob on the panel. Moreover, the on/off setting of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/ [R] jacks can be turned on/off via the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF] button. [UTILITY] [Settings] [Audio I/O] “A/D Input” (page 190) Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Sequencer Block This lets you create Songs by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller block or an external device), allowing you to play the data back with the tone generator block. Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Songs A Song is created by recording your keyboard performance as MIDI sequence data to individual Tracks. The MODX can store up to 128 Songs. Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Tracks This is a memory location on the sequencer where your musical performances are stored. One Part can be recorded to one track. Since the MODX has 16 tracks for one Song, you can record and play back a 16Part performance. MIDI recording You can record your keyboard performance to the Song. You can record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events. Your keyboard performance and controller/knob operations will be recorded to the Track when the corresponding Keyboard Control Switch for the Part is turned ON. NOTE The Control Change messages and Parameter Change messages can be recorded by operating the Knobs. For details on Control Change messages, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. NOTE For detailed instruction, refer to the Owner’s Manual. MODX Reference Manual 10 Basic Structure Arpeggio Block This block lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases by simply pressing a note or notes on the keyboard. Yamaha’s Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas—both in composing and performing. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Arpeggio categories Motion Sequencer block The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories (including “No Assign” and “Control/Hybrid Seq”) as listed below. The categories are based on instrument type. Effect block Arpeggio Type Category List Controller block Envelope Follower block Internal Memory Piano Piano Pad Pad/Choir Keys Keyboard SynCp Syn Comp Organ Organ CPerc Chromatic Perc Gtr Guitar Dr/Pc Drum/Perc Display (touch panel) config. Bass Bass S.FX Sound FX Performance Play (Home) Str String M.FX Musical FX Motion Control Brass Brass Ethnc Ethnic Mixing WW Woodwind --- No Assign Scene SynLd Syn Lead Ct/Hb Control / Hybrid Seq Play/Rec Reference Normal Part (AWM) Edit Sub categories Drum Part Edit The Arpeggio categories are divided into the sub categories listed below. Because the sub categories are listed based on the music genre, it is easy to find the sub category appropriate for your desired music style. Common/Audio Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Arpeggio Type Sub Category List Category Search Utility Live Set Rock Rock World World Pop Rock Pop Rock General General Ballad Ballad No Assign No Assign Chill Chillout / Ambient Filter Filter * Hip Hop Hip Hop Exprs Expression * Funk Funk Pan Pan * Modern R&B Modern R&B Mod Modulation * Classic R&B Classic R&B PBend Pitch Bend * House House / Dance Pop Assign Assign 1/2 * Techno Techno / Trance Comb Comb * Jazz Jazz / Swing Zone Zone Velocity * D&B D&B / Breakbeats Z.Pad Zone Vel for Pad * Latin Latin iPhone/iPad connection NOTE In the Category Search display, the Sub Categories marked with an asterisk (*) are displayed only when “Control/Hybrid Seq” is selected as the Category type. MODX Reference Manual 11 Basic Structure Arpeggio Type Name Functional blocks The Arpeggio Types are named according to certain rules and abbreviations. Once you understand these rules and abbreviations, you’ll find it easy to browse through and select the desired Arpeggio Types. Tone Generator block A/D Input block Arpeggio types with “_N” at the end of the type name (example: HipHop1_N) Sequencer block These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and Arpeggios with complex notes can be created even when triggered by one note (page 14). Arpeggio block Arpeggio types with “_C” at the end of the type name (example: Rock1_C) Effect block These Arpeggios are for using with the Normal Part, and correct Arpeggios can be created corresponding to the chord you play (page 14). Envelope Follower block Arpeggio types with a normal name (example: UpOct1) Internal Memory In addition to the above types, there are three playback types: the Arpeggios created for use of Normal Parts and played back using only the played notes and their octave notes (page 14), the Arpeggios created for use of Drum Parts (page 15), and Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (page 15). Arpeggio types with “_AF1”, “_AF2”, or “_AF1&2” at the end of the type name (example: Electro Pop AF1) When these Arpeggios are played, both of [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are automatically turned ON and the phrase starts playback. Motion Sequencer block Controller block Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Arpeggio types with [Mg] at the beginning of the type name (example: [Mg]HardRock1) These Arpeggios are for using with a Mega Voice. Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Mega Voices and Mega Voice Arpeggios Normal sound uses velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a Part change according to how strongly or softly you play the keyboard—giving greater authenticity and natural response to these Parts. However Mega Voices have a very complex structure with many different layers that are not suitable for playing manually. Mega Voices were developed specifically to be played by Mega Voice Arpeggios to produce incredibly realistic results. You should always use Mega Voices with Mega Voice Arpeggios. Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection The Arpeggio Type List in the Data List PDF document contains the following columns. Main Sub ARP Category Category No. ApKb Rock 1 ARP Name MA_70s Rock _ES Time Original Random Signature Length Tempo Accent SFX 4/4 2 Sound Type 130 Acoustic Piano : ApKb Rock 2 MB_70s Rock _ES 4/4 1 130 ApKb Rock 3 MC_70s Rock 4/4 2 130 ApKb Rock 4 MD_70s Rock 4/4 4 130 ApKb Rock 5 FA_70s Rock 4/4 1 130 ApKb Rock 6 FB_70s Rock _ES 4/4 1 130 ApKb Rock 7 FC_70s Rock _ES 4/4 2 130 NOTE Note that this list is for illustration purposes only. For a complete listing of the Arpeggio Types, see the Data List PDF document. 1 Main Category Indicates an Arpeggio Main Category. 2 Sub Category Indicates an Arpeggio Sub Category. 3 ARP No (Arpeggio Number) Indicates the Arpeggio type number. 4 ARP Name (Arpeggio Name) Indicates the Arpeggio Name. MODX Reference Manual 12 Basic Structure 5 Time Signature Indicates the time signature or meter of the Arpeggio type. Functional blocks Tone Generator block 6 Length Indicates the data length (amount of measures) of the Arpeggio type. When the Loop parameter set to “off,” the Arpeggio plays back for this length and stops. *1 is A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block 7 Original Tempo Indicates the appropriate tempo value of the Arpeggio type. Note that this tempo is not set automatically when selecting an Arpeggio type. Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block 8 Accent The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the Accent Phrase feature (page 14). Controller block Internal Memory 9 Random SFX The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the SFX feature (page 14). ) Sound Type Reference Display (touch panel) config. Indicates the sound type appropriate for the Arpeggio Type. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control *1 The Loop parameter is set as follows. [EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] (page 82) Mixing Scene Arpeggio-related settings Play/Rec There are several methods for triggering and stopping the Arpeggio playback. In addition, you can set whether or not SFX sounds and special Accent Phrases are triggered along with the normal sequence data. Drum Part Edit Normal Part (AWM) Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Turning Arpeggio playback on/off Utility The following three settings are available for turning the Arpeggio playback on/off. Live Set iPhone/iPad connection To play the Arpeggio only when the note is pressed: Set the “Hold” parameter to “Off” and the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Gate.” To continue the Arpeggio even if the note is released: Set the “Hold” parameter to “On” and the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Gate.” To toggle the Arpeggio playback on/off whenever the note is pressed: Set the “Trigger Mode” parameter to “Toggle.” The “Hold” parameter can be set to either “On” or “Off.” NOTE “Hold” is set as follows. [EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] (page 82) NOTE When receiving a MIDI sustain message (control change #64) with both of “Arp Master” and “Arp Part” set to “On,” you can obtain the same result by setting “Hold” to “On.” NOTE “Trigger Mode” is set as follows. [EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] (page 87) Using the Knobs to control Arpeggios By pressing the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button and selecting “ARP/MS,” you can use the Knobs 1–2 to control Arpeggio playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of the Knobs 1–2, see Quick Edit (page 37). Arpeggio functions which can be controlled by Knob operations Knob 1 MODX Reference Manual Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4 13 Basic Structure Accent Phrases Functional blocks Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold parameter. If it is hard to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value. Tone Generator block NOTE “Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter is set as follows. Motion Sequencer block [EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] (page 87) NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF document. A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Random SFX Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret noises) when the note is released. The following parameters affecting Random SFX are provided. Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) For turning the Random SFX on/off: Random SFX parameter For setting the volume of the SFX sound: Velocity Offset (Random SFX Velocity Offset) parameter Mixing For determining whether or not the volume of the SFX sound is controlled by velocity: Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key on Control) parameter Play/Rec Motion Control NOTE “Random SFX,” “Velocity Offset,” and “Key On Ctrl” are set as follows. [EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] (page 87) Scene Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit NOTE The Random SFX function is not available for the Arpeggio which stops when the note is released. Common/Audio Edit NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use the Random SFX function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF document. Category Search Arpeggio playback types Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection There are three main Arpeggio playback types as described below. Arpeggios for Normal Parts Arpeggio types (belonging to all categories except for Drum/Perc and a part of Control/HybridSeq) created for use of Normal Parts have the following three playback types. Playback of played notes only The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note(s) and octave notes. Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played notes These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence—meaning that notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Pressing another note triggers a transposed sequence using the pressed note as the new root note. Adding notes to those already held changes the sequence accordingly. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_N” at the end of the type name. Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord These Arpeggio types created for use with Normal Parts are played back to match the chord type determined by detecting the notes you play on the keyboard. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_C” at the end of the type name. NOTE When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Sort” or “Sort+Drct,” the same sequence is played back no matter what order you play the notes. When the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct,” a different sequence is played back depending on the order you play the notes. NOTE Since these types are programmed for Normal Parts, using them with Drum Parts may not produce musically appropriate results. MODX Reference Manual 14 Arpeggios for Drum Parts Arpeggio types in Drum/Perc categories are programmed specifically for use with Drum Parts, giving you instant access to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available. Playback of a drum pattern Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum instruments) Effect block Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern. Controller block Envelope Follower block Internal Memory Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments) Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using the same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes, when the “Key Mode” parameter is set to “Thru” or “Thru+Drct.” Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control NOTE The three playback types above are not distinguished by category name or type name. You’ll have to actually play the types and hear the difference. NOTE Since these types are programmed for Drum Parts, using them with Normal Parts may not produce musically appropriate results. Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events Arpeggio types (in Control/HybridSeq main categories with Filter, Expression, Pan, Modulation, Pitch Bend, and Assign 1/2 sub categories) are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. They are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes. In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the “Key Mode” parameter to “Direct,” “Sort+Drct,” or “Thru+Drct.” Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection NOTE Settings related to Key Mode are set as follows. [EDIT] Part Selection Element/Operator [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] (page 82) Tips for Arpeggio playback Arpeggios not only provide inspiration and full rhythmic passages over which you can perform, they give you quality MIDI data you can use in creating Songs, or fully formed backing parts to be used in your live performances. For instructions on using Arpeggio, see the Owner’s Manual. MODX Reference Manual 15 Basic Structure Creating an Arpeggio Functional blocks In addition to using the preset Arpeggios, you can also create your own original Arpeggio data. First, record a phrase to Song Tracks (up to a maximum of four). Then, convert the Song (or the MIDI sequence data) to Arpeggio data from the Put Track to Arpeggio display. Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block 1 Record MIDI sequence data to a Song. 2 Convert the MIDI sequence data (recorded to the Song) to Arpeggio data. Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Song Recording Arpeggio Controller block Internal Memory Track 1 User Arpeggio 256 Track 2 Track 3 Recording Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Recording Reference User Arpeggio 001 Track 4 Track 1 Display (touch panel) config. Track 2 Performance Play (Home) Track 3 Motion Control Track 4 Track 8 Mixing Scene Track 9 Track 10 Play/Rec Convert Track 11 Recording Normal Part (AWM) Edit Track 12 Drum Part Edit [SONG] (Play) button or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI] Touch the Song Name [User Arp] Track 13 Track 14 Track 15 Track 16 Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility You can record MIDI sequence data for the Arpeggio to any of the Tracks. After recording, select four Tracks from all sixteen and convert them to Arpeggio data. After the above procedure, select tracks from the Put Track to Arpeggio display (page 63) to convert the Song to your own Arpeggio. Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Determining how Song/Pattern data is converted to an Arpeggio – Convert Type MIDI sequence data (of Song Tracks) can be converted to Arpeggio data in one of three ways, according to the Convert types below. These types can also be selected independently for each destination Track— providing enormous flexibility and performance control. Normal (Normal Arpeggio) The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes. Fixed Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data. OrgNotes (Original Notes) Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ according to the played chord. Record the MIDI sequence data to a Song Track, referring to the previous instructions in this chapter as needed. The examples listed below are used as reference. Creating a rhythm pattern (using a Drum Voice) Track 1 Record a basic rhythm pattern using various drum instruments. Convert via “Fixed.” Track 2–4 Record a different rhythm pattern using a specific drum instrument to each Track. Convert via “Normal.” Creating a bass line (using a Normal Voice) Track 1 Record a bass line using a specific desired key (root). Track 2–4 MODX Reference Manual Convert via “OrgNote” after the OrgNotes Root is set. off 16 Basic Structure Motion Sequencer Block The powerful Motion Sequencer feature lets you dynamically change sounds by operating Parameters depending on sequences created in advance. It provides real time control for changing sounds depending on various sequences such as Tempo, Arpeggio, or the rhythm of external connected devices. You can assign up to eight desired Sequence types for one Lane. You can also set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. The setting status (on or off) the Lanes in the entire Performance will be shown as follows. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Motion Seq] (page 44) Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Also, the parameters for each Lane are set as follows. Controller block [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [Motion Seq] [Lane] (page 91) Lane setting Functional blocks Sequence Patterns for the Lane Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Selected Sequence setting Lane setting Turning the Motion Sequencer on/off The following settings are available for turning the Motion Sequencer playback on/off. To play the Motion Sequence when the note is pressed: Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger” parameter to “Off,” and the” Sync” parameter to “Off.” To play the Motion Sequence when the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is pressed: Set the “LaneSW” parameter to “On,” the “Trigger” parameter to “On,” and the “Sync” parameter to “Off.” NOTE “LaneSW” and “Trigger” are set as follows. [EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [MOTION Seq] [Lane] (page 91) MODX Reference Manual 17 Basic Structure Using the Knobs to control Motion Sequencer Functional blocks By pressing the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button and selecting “ARP/MS,” you can use the Knobs 3–4 to control Motion Sequencer playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of the Knobs 3–4, see Quick Edit (page 37). Motion Sequencer functions which can be controlled by Knob operations Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4 Reference Editing Motion Sequences You can create a custom Motion Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. For details about Editing, see page 93. Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Parameters related to Motion Sequencer In this instrument, Motion Sequencer is considered as a virtual controller and can be selectable in the “Source” parameter. The target parameter you want to control by Motion Sequencer is set in the “Destination” parameter. For details, see page 100. Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection MODX Reference Manual 18 Basic Structure Effect Block This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block as well as audio input block, processing and enhancing the sound. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change the sound as desired. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Effect structure Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block System Effects—Variation and Reverb Envelope Follower block System Effects are applied to the overall sound. With System Effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the effect according to the Effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent back to the mixer according to the Return Level, and output—after being mixed with the unprocessed “dry” sound. This instrument is equipped with Variation and Reverb as System Effects. In addition, you can set the Send Level from Variation to Reverb. This parameter is used to apply Reverb to the signals output from the Variation. You can get a natural effect by applying Reverb depth to the Variation sound with the same level as that of the dry sound. Controller block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Insertion Effects Mixing Insertion Effects can be applied individually to each of specified parts before merging signals of all parts. It should be used for sounds for which you want to drastically change the character. You can set different Effect types to the Insertion Effects A and B for each Part. These settings can be made from Part Edit [Effect] (page 75, page 136, page 150). This synthesizer features 13 sets of Insertion Effects. They can be applied to Parts1–8 and four of the Parts 9–16 and A/D Input Part. Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Master Effect Utility This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. Multiple Effect types are available. Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Element EQ Element EQ is applied to each Element of the Normal Part (AWM2) and each key of the Drum Part. You can specify one of three different EQ shapes, including shelving and peaking. NOTE Element EQ does not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Part EQ This EQ is applied to a Part before and after the Insertion Effect. Part 3-band parametric EQ Part EQ Insertion Effect 2-band parametric EQ Part EQ Master EQ Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all five bands can be set to peaking, with shelving being available also for the lowest and highest bands. MODX Reference Manual 19 Basic Structure Effect connection Functional blocks 1 Each EQ and Insertion Effect applied to each Part Performance Tone Generator block Part EQ Insertion A/B Part A/D Input block 2 Variation and Reverb related parameters Sequencer block Setting: Part Edit [Effect] [Routing] (page 75, page 136, page 150) Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Routing] (page 169) Arpeggio block Send Level Motion Sequencer block Variation 3 Master Effect related parameters Envelope Follower block Reverb Setting: Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Master FX] (page 172) Variation to Reverb 4 Master EQ related parameters Effect block Controller block Internal Memory System Effect Setting: Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Master EQ] (page 173) Return Level NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L/ MONO]/[R] jacks, the effect is set in Common/Audio Edit [Audio In]. Master Effect Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Master EQ Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit About the Vocoder Effect Normal Part (FM-X) Edit MODX features a Vocoder effect. Vocoder is a distinctive, “robot voice” effect which extracts the characteristic of the microphone sound and adds it to the sound via your keyboard performance. The human voice consists of sounds generated from the vocal cords, and filtered by the throat, nose and mouth. These resonant sections have specific frequency characteristics and they function effectively as a filter, creating many formants (harmonic content). The Vocoder effect extracts the filter characteristics of the voice from the microphone input and recreates the vocal formants by the use of multiple band pass filters. The machine-like ‘robot’ voice is created by passing the pitched sounds of musical instruments (such as a synthesizer sound) through the filters. Mic Input or Part Output Part Output (Keyboard Performance) Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Extracting the characteristic of the input sound Creating formants Robot-like voice Vocoder About Effect categories, Effect types, and Effect parameters For information regarding the effect categories of this instrument and the effect types contained in their categories, see the “Effect Type List” in the Data List PDF document. For information on the effect parameters which can be set in the each effect type, see the “Effect Parameter List” in the Data List PDF document. For information on the descriptions of each effect category, each effect type, and each effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameters Manual PDF document. About Preset settings Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are provided as templates and can be selected in the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try first selecting one of the Presets close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary. Preset settings can be determined by setting “Preset” in each effect parameter display. For information on each effect type, see the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 20 Basic Structure Envelope Follower Block Envelope Follower is a function for detecting the envelope of the input signal waveform and modifying sounds dynamically. This function allows you to control not only Part outputs but also input signals from external devices connected to the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. The Input source of each Envelope Follower is fixed such as Part 1 for EnvFollower 1, Part 2 for EnvFollower 2, and the Audio Part for EnvFollower AD. However, the signal output from each Envelope Follower can be another “input source” for any desired destination such as each Part or even the entire Performance. For example, you can modify the sound of Part 2 by using the Envelope Follower for Part 1 (EnvFollower 1) as the “Source.” The Envelope Follower as the “Source” and the target parameter to be controlled by the Envelope Follower (which is called “Destination”) are set in the Control Assign display (page 100). Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Each Envelope Follower EnvFollower 1 EnvFollower 2 EnvFollower MST EnvFollower AD Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Part 1 Entire Performance Part 2 Motion Control Audio Part (sixteen Parts and Audio Part) Each Input source for Envelope Follower Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Input signal to Envelope Follower (Fixed) Output signal from Envelope Follower (The Destination is flexible) Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Selected Envelope Follower Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Signal flow of Envelope Follower Input sources for Envelope Follower [EDIT] Common/Audio Edit [Audio In] [Routing] “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower AD) [EDIT] Common/Audio Edit [Effect] [Routing] “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower MST) [EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [Effect] [Routing] “Envelope Follower” (EnvFollower 1–16) MODX Reference Manual 21 Basic Structure Controller Block This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Assignable Switches, Knobs, Control Sliders and Super Knob. By operating these controllers, you can transmit MIDI messages to the tone generator block to play and modify sounds, or to the DAW software to further control the sounds. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Keyboard Arpeggio block The keyboard transmits the note on/off messages to the Tone Generator Block (for sounding) and Sequencer Block (for recording). You can change the note range of the keyboard in octaves by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons, transpose the notes by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button, and set how the actual velocity is generated according to the strength with which you play notes. Pitch Bend wheel Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. Roll the wheel upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/downward. This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. The Pitch Bend Range setting can be changed in Part Edit [Part Settings] [Pitch] (page 68). Functions other than Pitch Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend wheel in the Part Edit [Mod/Control] [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153). Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Pitch up Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Pitch down Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Modulation wheel Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Performances have other functions and effects assigned to the wheel. The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied to the sound. To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current Performance, make sure the Modulation wheel is set to minimum before you start playing. Various functions can be assigned to the Modulation wheel in Part Edit [Mod/Control] [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153). Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Maximum Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Minimum Assignable Switches According to the XA (Expanded Articulation) Control settings (page 6) in Element Edit [Osc/Tune] (page 107), you can call up specific Elements of the current Part by pressing each of these buttons during your keyboard performance. You can select how the on/off status of these buttons is switched in Common/ Audio Edit [General] (page 159). Furthermore, you can assign various functions (other than calling up specific Elements) to these buttons in Part Edit [Mod/Control] [Control Assign] (page 100, page 153). Knobs and Control Sliders These knobs and sliders let you change various aspects of the Part’s sound in real time—while you play. For instructions on using the knobs and control sliders, see the Owner’s Manual. For instructions on using the Knobs 1–4 (5–8), see “Quick Edit” (page 35). Super Knob The Super Knob lets you simultaneously control the parameters common to all Parts (Assign 1–8) which are assigned to the eight knobs. For instructions on using the Super Knob, see the Owner’s Manual. For the editable setting values for the Super Knob, see the Super Knob display (page 45). Also, for instructions on setting the Assign 1–8 controls, see the Control Assign display (page 166) for the Common/Audio Edit. MODX Reference Manual 22 Basic Structure Internal Memory The MODX creates a variety of different kinds of data, including Performances, Live Sets, and Songs. This section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing them. Data communication between this synthesizer and an external device Internal Memory Recall Buffer Compare Buffer Excluding Master and Utility settings Excluding Master and Utility settings Internal data communication Preset Memory • • • • • • • • Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Preset Performance Arpeggio Motion Sequence Audition Phrase Waveform Live Set Curve Micro Tuning Envelope Follower block MIDI instrument or computer Controller block DAW software Internal Memory Reference Bulk Dump • Performance Edit • Motion Sequence Edit User Curve Edit Live Set Edit User Micro Tuning Edit User Waveform Edit • • • • • • User Performance User Arpeggio User Motion Sequence User Curve User Live Set User Micro Tuning • Utility • Quick Setup • User Audition Phrase For Library • Song USB flash drive For User • User Waveform • Utility • Quick Setup Performance Play (Home) User Memory Song Load/Save • • • • Store (executed by using store button) Edit Buffer Display (touch panel) config. Motion Control File extension “.X8A” Mixing MOTIF XF format File extensions “.X3A,” “.X3V,” “.X3G,” and “.X3W” MOTIF XS format File extensions “.X0A,” “.X0V,” “.X0G,” and “.X0W” MOXF format File extensions “.X6A,” “.X6V,” “.X6G,” and “.X6W” Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit File extension “.X8U” MONTAGE format File extension “.X7U” File extensions “.X8L” MONTAGE format File extension “.X7L” Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection File extensions “.MID” File extensions “.WAV” Audio Record/Playback File extensions “.WAV” “.AIF” Preset Memory Preset Memory is memory designed specifically for reading out data such as Preset Performance, Arpeggio, and Audition Phrase. You cannot overwrite the data in Preset Memory. Edit buffer The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Performance, Live Set, and Song. Although the edit buffer is designed specifically for data writing and data reading, the data contained in the edit buffer is lost when the power is turned off. You should always store edited data to User memory before editing new performance or before turning off the power. Data other than Performance and Motion Sequence are automatically stored. User memory User data edited in the Edit buffer and utility settings for the entire system are stored in the dedicated area in the User memory. Up to eight Library files (.X8L) read from the USB flash drive are loaded in the dedicated area in the User memory. This is read-write memory and the data will be kept even after the power is turned off. MODX Reference Manual 23 Recall buffer and Compare buffer If you’ve selected another Performance without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored on backup memory, called the Recall buffer. Also, the instrument has a Compare buffer in which the sound settings prior to editing will temporarily be reinstated for comparison purposes. You can switch between the just-edited sound and its unedited condition, and hear how your edits affect the sound. Both of these are read-write memory types. However, you should make sure to store the sequence data before turning off the power, because any sequence data you’ve created will be lost when the power is turned off. For instructions on using the Compare function, see the Owner’s Manual. Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Motion Sequencer block Effect block Envelope Follower block Controller block Internal Memory Reference Display (touch panel) config. Performance Play (Home) Motion Control Mixing Scene Play/Rec Normal Part (AWM) Edit Drum Part Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common/Audio Edit Category Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection MODX Reference Manual 24 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Display (touch panel) Reference Display (touch panel) configuration This section explains the navigation bar which is common to all types of displays. 1 2 3 Navigation bar 4 5 6 7 8 1 HOME icon Moves to the Performance Play display (page 27). 2 EXIT icon Functions same as the [EXIT] button on the panel. Press this icon to exit from the current display and return to the previous level in the hierarchy. 3 [INFORMATION] area Displays helpful information, including the currently selected display name. 4 EFFECT icon Touch the icon to call up the Effect Switch display (page 209). The icon turns off when any of the Effect blocks (Insertion, System or Master) is off. 5 QUICK SETUP icon Displays the settings of Local Control ON/OFF and MIDI IN/OUT. The keyboard-shaped icon lights up when Local Control is set to ON and turns off when Local Control is set to OFF. When MIDI is set as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a MIDI connector-shaped icon appears. When USB is set as the MIDI IN/OUT setting, a USB connector-shaped icon appears. Touch the desired icon to call up the corresponding Quick Setup display (page 188). 6 TEMPO SETTINGS icon Displays the tempo of the currently selected Performance. Touch the icon to call up the Tempo Settings display (page 207). 7 LIVE SET icon Touch the icon to call up the Live Set display (page 212). 8 UTILITY icon Touch the icon to call up the last opened display among the Utility displays. MODX Reference Manual 25 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Display (touch panel) 9 Scroll buttons Live Set Display All button Display All 9 Pop-up List Displays setting values for parameters. When the setting values are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use the Scroll buttons to scroll through the pages or the Display All button to display all of the setting values. MODX Reference Manual 26 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Performance Play (Home) Home From the Performance Play display you can play a selected Performance and edit some of the Performance-related settings. Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Home Arpeggio Operation Motion Seq Press the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button or Touch the [HOME] icon ^ 1 Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing 2 Scene Play / Rec MIDI 3 Audio 4 6 5 7 9 8 ) ! @ #$ % 1 Performance name Indicates the currently selected Performance name. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Category Search, Edit, and Recall. NOTE Once you edit any parameter in the selected Performance, a blue flag icon appears at right in the Performance Name. 2 Part indicator When the cursor is on the Performance name or on Parts 1–8, this indicates whether Parts 9–16 are used or not. When the cursor is on Parts 9–16, it indicates whether Parts 1–8 are used or not. If Parts 9–16 are not in use, this indicator is not shown. 3 Flag Indicates the tone generation attributes of the currently selected Performance. (See chart below.) Flag Definition AWM2 Performance comprised only of AWM2 Parts FM-X Performance comprised only of FM-X Parts AWM2+FM-X Performance comprised of both AWM2 and FM-X Parts MC Performance featuring Motion Control SSS Performance featuring Seamless Sound Switching 4 Knob functions Indicates the functions currently assigned to the Knobs 1–4 (5–8). MODX Reference Manual 27 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility 5 Type/Name Switch Switches between the displays of Part Type/Category and Part Name. Settings: Type, Name 6 Part Types / Part Names Indicates the Part types and categories or the Part names. Touching the parameter calls up the menu for Category Search, Edit, and Copy. To add another Part, touch the “+” icon. Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq 7 Common Motion Sequencer switch Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of the Common/AD Parts is on or off. When all Lane switches of the Common/AD Parts are off, this switch is not shown. Settings: Off, On Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene 8 Part Arpeggio On/Off switch Determines whether the Arpeggio of each Part is on or off. When the Arpeggio and the Arpeggio Hold are set to on, “Arp Hold On” is displayed. NOTE You can turn the Arpeggio Hold for the Part on or off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and touching this switch. Settings: Off, On Play / Rec MIDI Audio 9 Part Motion Sequencer switch Determines whether the Motion Sequencer of each Part is on or off. When all Lane switches of the Part are off, this switch is not shown. Settings: Off, On ) Note Limit Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Part’s note range. For example, setting a Note Limit of “C5–C4” lets you hear the Part by playing notes in the two ranges of C-2 to C4 and C5 to G8; notes played between C4 and C5 have no sound. For details about the Note Limit setting, see the Owner’s Manual. Settings: C -2 – G8 ! Keyboard Control switch Determines whether the Keyboard Control for each Part is on or off. When this switch is set to off, the Part will not sound even you play the keyboard (unless the Part is selected). Settings: Off, On @ Switching Mute on/off for Parts Determines whether the Mute for each Part is on or off. Settings: Off, On # Switching Solo on/off for Parts Determines whether the Solo for each Part is on or off. Settings: Off, On $ Volume of Parts Determines the Volume for the Part. Settings: 0–127 NOTE When the triangle marks for the Volume are shown in blue, the volume change created by the control sliders is not reflected to the overall sound. When the value changed by the control slider reaches the value shown as a blue triangle, the triangle mark changes to white, and the volume change created by the control sliders are reflected to the overall sound. % Meter Indicates the audio output level of the Part. MODX Reference Manual 28 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility ^ View Determines whether the detailed information of each Part is displayed (On) or not displayed (Off). The displayed information differs depending on the cursor position or the Control function settings. Settings: Off, On NOTE When the cursor is on the Performance name on the Performance Play (Home) display, you can also switch the information views by pressing the [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] button. Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio This section explains when “View” is turned on. Motion Seq Super Knob Element view This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Normal Part (AWM2), and Motion Control Overview Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON. Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Element Level Element Switch Element SW (Element switch) Determines whether each Element is active or not. Settings: Off, On Element Level Determines the output level of the Element. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 29 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Drum Key view Live Set Performance This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Drum Part, and Motion Control Overview Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON. Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Drum Key Level Drum Key Level Determines the output level of the Drum Key. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 30 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Algorithm view Live Set Performance This appears only when the currently selected Part is the Normal Part (FM-X), and Motion Control Overview Slider Function [Elem/Op Control] button is ON. Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Operator Level Algorithm (Algorithm Number) Changes Algorithms. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. NOTE Tapping the Algorithm image calls up the Algorithm Search display. Feedback (Feedback Level) Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that operator. This allows you to set the feedback level. Settings: 0–7 Operator Level Determines the output level of the Operator. Settings: 0–99 MODX Reference Manual 31 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Part – Note view Live Set Performance This appears only when the [PART CONTROL] button is turned on or the cursor is on the Note Limit. This is useful for checking the Layer/Split settings among Parts. Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Note Limit Velocity – Note view This appears only when the cursor is on any velocity limit of Parts. This is useful for setting Velocity split among Parts. Velocity Limit MODX Reference Manual 32 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Motion Control Live Set Performance Home From the Motion Control display you can edit all Motion Control settings, such as general sound settings, Arpeggio, and the Motion Sequencer of the currently selected Performance. The Motion Control section contains the following various displays. • Overview • Quick Edit • Arpeggio • Motion Sequencer • Super Knob • Knob Auto Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec Motion Control MIDI Audio Overview The Overview display indicates the illustration of the connection between Controllers and Parts. You can confirm the current settings here. NOTE Lines between the most recently used controller and Part are shown in bold. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Overview] or [SHIFT] + [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] Part Indicates the currently selected Part. To confirm a Part’s connections, select the Part here. Settings: Common, Part 1–16 Edit Common Control Settings/Edit Part Control Settings Calls up the Control Assign display for the selected Part. For “Common,” see page 166. For Part 1–16, see page 100. Slider Function Switches among Performance Control, Part Control, and Element/Operator Control. Settings: Part Control, Elem/Op Control NOTE You can store Slider function operations as Performance data. MODX Reference Manual 33 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Controller Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Controller” and Part is shown. The “Controller” here refers to: • Pitch Bend wheel • Modulation wheel • [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons (Assignable switches 1 and 2) • [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion sequencer Hold) button • [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion sequencer trigger) button Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Settings: Off, On Super Knob Assignable Knob Auto Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Assignable” and Part is shown. The “Assignable” here refers to: • Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) Settings: Off, On Fader Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Fader” and Part is shown. The “Fader” here refers to: • Control sliders 1–4 (5–8 / 9–12 / 13–16) Settings: Off, On Super Knob Determines whether or not the illustration of the connection between “Super Knob” and Part is shown. The “Super Knob” here refers to: • Super Knob Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 34 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Quick Edit Home From the Quick Edit display you can make general sound settings. You can select whether the settings are commonly applied to all Parts or to only one selected Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Quick Edit] Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Part Indicates the currently selected Part. Select the Part you want to use Quick Edit with here. Settings: Common, Part 1–16 When “Part” is set to “Common” You can edit the parameters commonly applied to all Parts. Performance Name Enters the desired name for the Performance. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time) Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note is played until the maximum initial level of the Cutoff Frequency is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG (page 118) for the Element/Operator Common. Settings: -64 – +63 FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time) Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG parameter (page 118) for the Element/Operator Common. Settings: -64 – +63 FEG Rel (FEG Release Time) Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. This parameter determines the offset value for the FEG parameter (page 118) of the Element/Operator Common. Settings: -64 – +63 Edit Master EQ Calls up the Master EQ display (page 173) for Common/Audio Edit. MODX Reference Manual 35 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Edit All Arp (Edit All Arpeggio) Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 41) for Motion Control. Edit Common MS (Edit Common Motion Sequencer) Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 165) for Common/Audio Edit. Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Determines the Cutoff Frequency for the Filter, when the Low Pass Filter is selected, for example, the larger the value the brighter the decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the Filter Cutoff Frequency (page 115) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common. Settings: -64 – +63 Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Resonance Mixing Determines the emphasis given to the Cutoff Frequency. This parameter determines the offset value of the Filter Resonance (page 116) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator Common. Scene Settings: -64 – +63 Play / Rec MIDI FEG Depth Audio Determines the range over which the cutoff frequency of the Filter EG changes. This parameter determines the offset value of the FEG Depth (page 118) for the Element/Operator Common. Settings: -64 – +63 Portamento (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time when Portamento is applied. This parameter is synchronized to the same parameter for the Common/Audio Edit. Settings: -64 – +63 Attack (AEG Attack Time) Determines the speed of attack from the time a key is played until the maximum initial level of the AEG is reached. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator. Settings: -64 – +63 Decay (AEG Decay Time) Determines how fast the volume falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157). for the Element/Drum Key/ Operator Settings: -64 – +63 Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Determines the sustain level at which the volume will continue while a note is held, after the initial attack and decay. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for the Element/Drum Key/Operator. Settings: -64 – +63 Release (AEG Release Time) Determines how fast the volume falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. This parameter determines the offset value of the AEG (page 123, page 143, page 157) for the Element/ Drum Key/Operator. Settings: -64 – +63 Low Gain (Maser EQ Low Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB MODX Reference Manual 36 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Live Set Performance Home Motion Control High Gain (Master EQ High Gain) Overview Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band. Quick Edit Settings: -12dB – +12dB Arpeggio Pan (Performance Pan) Motion Seq Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. This parameter offsets the same parameter in the Part Edit setting. Super Knob Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Knob Auto Mixing Var Return (Variation Return) Determines the Return level of the Variation Effect. Settings: 0–127 Rev Return (Reverb Return) Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Determines the Return level of the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0–127 Common Clock Swing (Common Swing) Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part. Settings: -120 – +120 Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance. This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer of the Part is set to “Common.” By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one. Settings: 50%–400% 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time) Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part. Settings: -100 – +100 Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part. Settings: -100 – +100 Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Settings: -64 – +63 Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step curve shape of the sequence. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter). Settings: -100 – +100 MODX Reference Manual 37 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Settings: -64 – +63 Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random) Motion Seq Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Super Knob Settings: -64 – +63 Knob Auto Mixing Scene When “Part” is set to Part 1–16 You can edit the parameters for the selected Part. Play / Rec MIDI Audio Part Category Main (Part Main Category) Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category) Determines the Main Category and Sub Category of the Part. The categories are keywords representing the general characteristics of the Parts. Selecting the appropriate category makes it easy to find the desired Part from the huge variety of Parts available. There are 17 Main Categories which indicate types of instruments. There are up to nine Sub Categories for each Main Category, indicating more detailed types of instruments. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 38 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Part Name Enters the desired name for the Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. The parameters below are same as the ones when “Part” is set to “Common” (page 35). • FEG Atk (FEG Attack Time) • FEG Decay (FEG Decay Time) • FEG Rel (FEG Release Time) • Cutoff • Resonance • FEG Depth • Portamento (Portamento Time) The setting values differ from the ones which “Part” is set to “Common.” Settings: 0–127 • • • • Attack (AEG Attack Time) Decay (AEG Decay Time) Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Release (AEG Release Time) Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio FEG Sus (FEG Sustain Level) Determines the FEG Sustain Level for the Part. This is the offset value for the FEG Decay2 Level of the Element/Operator Common (page 118). Settings: -64 – +63 Edit Part EQ Calls up the Part EQ display (page 78) for Part Edit. Edit Part Arp (Edit Part Arpeggio) Calls up the Arpeggio display (page 82) for Part Edit. Edit Part MS (Edit Part Motion Sequencer) Calls up the Motion Sequencer Lane display (page 91) for Part Edit. EQ Low Gain (3 band EQ Low Gain) Determines the level gain for the Low band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB EQ Mid Freq (3 band EQ Mid Frequency) Determines the frequency for the Mid band. Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz EQ Mid Gain (3 band EQ Mid Gain) Determines the level gain for the Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB EQ Mid Q (3 band EQ Mid Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band. Settings: 0.7–10.3 EQ High Gain (3 band EQ Hi Gain) Determines the level gain of the High band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Var Send (Variation Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Variation effect. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 39 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Rev Send (Reverb Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent to the Reverb effect. Settings: 0–127 Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Part Clock Swing (Part Swing) Overview Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. • +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes. • -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes. • 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing. Quick Edit Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce. Settings: -120 – +120 Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part. Settings: 50%–400%, Common 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. Play / Rec MIDI Audio Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time) Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 86) of each Arpeggio Select setting. Settings: 0%–200% Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate (page 85) of each Arpeggio Select setting. Settings: 0%–200% Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines the Amplitude (page 93) of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Settings: -64 – +63 Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 94) when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter. Settings: -100 – +100 Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Settings: -64 – +63 Part Motion Seq Random Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 40 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Arpeggio Home From the Arpeggio display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for multiple Parts. Touching the Arpeggio Type name on this display (or pressing the [CATEGORY] button on the panel) calls up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the Arpeggio Category Search display and touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by specifying the Arpeggio Number. Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Arpeggio] Motion Seq View Arpeggio Type Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Part 9-16 / Part 1-8 Switches between the displays of Parts 9–16 or the Parts 1–8. In case of the picture above, touch the “Part 9-16” to display the Arpeggio Types for the “Part 9-16.” Settings: Part 9-16 / Part 1-8 Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Determines whether the Arpeggio is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to the [ARP ON/OFF] button on the panel. Settings: Off, On Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the Arpeggio of multiple Parts is playing back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you trigger it. The number indicates the clock. Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Arp (Part Arpeggio Switch) Determines whether the Arpeggio for each Part is on or off. Settings: Off, On Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Determines the Arpeggio Types. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Arpeggios. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios” (page 86). Settings: 1–8 MODX Reference Manual 41 Reference Performance Edit View Determines which information regarding Arpeggio Type is displayed. Settings: Category, Number, Range Search Utility Live Set Performance Home Motion Control When “View” is set to “Category” Overview Category (Arpeggio Category) Quick Edit Settings: See the Arpeggio category list (page 11). Arpeggio Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category) Settings: See the Arpeggio sub category list (page 11). Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Name (Arpeggio Name) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. When “View” is set to “Number” Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Bank (Arpeggio Bank) Settings: Preset, User, Library 1–8 Number (Arpeggio Number) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Name (Arpeggio Name) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 42 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility When “View” is set to “Range” Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Name (Arpeggio Name) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit) Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger Arpeggio playback. For details on settings of Velocity Limit, see the Owner’s Manual. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit) Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. For details on settings of Note Limit, see the Owner’s Manual. Settings: C -2 – G8 MODX Reference Manual 43 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Live Set Performance Home From the Motion Sequencer display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer for multiple Parts. Motion Control Overview Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Motion Seq] Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for the entire Performance. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF] button on the panel. Settings: Off, On Active (Active Motion Sequencer) Indicates the number of the active Lane. The number after slash indicates the maximum number of the Lanes which can be activated simultaneously. PartSW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Determines whether the Motion Sequencer is on or off for each Part/all Parts. Settings: Off, On Lane Switch Determines whether each Lane is on or off. You can set up to four Lanes corresponding to the Motion Sequencer function for one Part. Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select) Determines the Motion Sequence Type. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Settings: 1–8 MODX Reference Manual 44 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Super Knob Home From the Super Knob display you can set parameters controlled by the Super knob. Motion Control Overview Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Super Knob] Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 1 Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 2 MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF] button on the panel. Settings: Off, On Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch) Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off. Settings: Off, On Edit Super Knob Motion Seq Shows the Knob Auto display, in which you can set the Motion Sequencer for the Super Knob. Edit Super Knob Shows the Control Assign display for Common/Audio Edit, in which you can set the parameters to be controlled by the Super Knob. LED Pattern (Super Knob LED Pattern) Determines the lighting pattern of the Super Knob. Settings: Type 1, Type 2-1, Type 2-2, Type 3-1, Type 3-2, Type 4-1, Type 4-2, Type 5-1, Type 5-2, Type 6, Type 7-1, Type 7-2, Type 8-1, Type 8-2, Type 9, Type 10, Type 11, Off Super Knob (Super Knob Value) Determines the value of the Super Knob. Settings: 0–127 Super Knob Link Turns the link between the Assignable Knob and the Super Knob on/off. When this is set to off, the function value assigned to the corresponding knob does not change even if the Super Knob is controlled. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 45 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Assignable Knob 1–8 Value Determines the value for the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8). Settings: 0–127 Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 1 Assignable Knob 1–8 Destination Value 2 Determines the lowest value (Assignable value 1) and the highest value (Assignable value 2) for the corresponding Knob. When you operate the Super Knob, the Assignable Knob value varies within the specified range. Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Settings: 0–127 Knob Auto Mixing Knob Auto Scene From the Knob Auto display you can set parameters related to Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob (Super Knob Motion Sequencer.) The parameter value of the Super Knob can be automatically controlled by the Motion Sequencer. You can set only one Lane for the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. Play / Rec MIDI Audio NOTE Up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. However, the Lane set for the Super Knob is not included in the eight referred to here. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Knob Auto] MS Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Turns the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance on/off. This setting is applied to the [MS ON/OFF] button on the panel. Settings: Off, On Super Knob MS (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Switch) Turns the Motion Sequencer applied to the Super Knob on/off. Settings: Off, On MS FX (Super Knob Motion Sequencer FX Receive) Determines whether or not the Motion Sequencer is affected by the knob operation when “ARP/MS” is selected with the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 46 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Trigger (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive) Determines whether the signal from the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button is received or not. When this is set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button. Settings: Off, On Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select) Determines the Motion Sequence Type. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Settings: 1–8 Sync Part (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync Part) Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Determines which Part is synchronized with the Super Knob Motion Sequencer. This setting is applied to the Note On Setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting for the selected Part. Mixing Settings: Part 1 – Part 16 Play / Rec Scene Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid) MIDI Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is displayed in clocks. For the Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied to the Part which is selected as the Sync Part (above). Audio Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Random (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Random) Determines the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. Settings: 0–127 Sync (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync) Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Super Knob is synchronized to the Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance. Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp Off: Super Knob Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external clock. Tempo: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo. Beat: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat. Arp: Super Knob Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing Arpeggio. Speed (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Speed) Determines the speed of the playback of the Motion Sequence. This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.” Settings: 0–127 Unit Multiply (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply) Adjusts the Super Knob Motion Sequencer playback time. This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is “Off.” Settings: 50%–6400%, Common 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. Key On Reset (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Key On Reset) Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard. This parameter is active when the Super Knob Motion Sequencer Sync is set to something other than “Arp.” Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.” Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning. 1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played. MODX Reference Manual 47 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Loop (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Loop) Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly. Home Settings: Off, On Motion Control Velocity Limit (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit) Overview Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values over which the Motion Sequence responds. Quick Edit Settings: 1–127 Arpeggio Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle) Motion Seq Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence. Super Knob Settings: 1–16 Knob Auto Load Sequence Mixing Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 198). Scene Play / Rec Edit Sequence Calls up the Motion Sequence Setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. MIDI Audio Motion Seq Step Value Motion Seq Step Type Cycle (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Cycle) Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 Amplitude (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes. Settings: 0–127 Smooth (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence. Settings: 0–127 Sequence Select (Super Knob Motion Sequence Select) Determines the Motion Sequence Type. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Settings: 1–8 MODX Reference Manual 48 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Polarity (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Polarity) Determines the Sequence Polarity. Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence. Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value. Motion Seq Step Value (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Value) Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13– 16 by the Control Sliders 1–4 depending on the cursor position on the display. Settings: 0–127 Motion Seq Step Type (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Type) Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for the Step 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13–16 by the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display. Settings: A, B Pulse A / Pulse B (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type) Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type” described above determines which curve set here is used for each step. The vertical axis indicates the step value and the horizontal axis indicates the time. For detail about the curve shapes, see page 102. Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold For User Bank: User 1–32 When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8 Direction (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction) Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence. Settings: Forward, Reverse Prm1 / Prm2 (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter) Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence. This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter values differs depending on the Curve Type. Control (Super Knob Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch) Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Settings: Off, On Store Sequence Stores the edited Motion Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 201). MODX Reference Manual 49 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Mixing Home From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume and effect settings for each Part. NOTE The settings in the Mixing display are stored as part of Performance data. Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Mixing Arpeggio Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Mixing] Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Part 1-16 / Audio Switch Part 1-16 / Audio Switch Switches between the displays of the Mixing settings for Parts 1–16 or the Mixing settings for Parts 1–8, the Audio Part, the Digital Part, and the Master. Settings: Part 1-16, Audio MODX Reference Manual 50 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility When one of Parts 1–16 is selected Determines the Mixing setting for each Part 1–16. Function Switch Part Category Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Part Category Indicates the Main category for the Part. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Function Switch Determines the Mute/Solo setting and the Keyboard Control settings for the selected Part 1–16. Settings: Mute/Solo, Kbd Ctrl • When “Mute/Solo” is selected Mute/Solo (Part Mute/Solo) Turns the Mute/Solo function on/off for the selected Part 1–16. When the function is on, this button lights. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 51 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility • When “Kbd Ctrl” is selected Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Kbd Ctrl (Keyboard Control) Turns the Keyboard Control function on/off for the selected Part 1–8. When the function is on, this button lights. Settings: Off, On 3-band/2-band Switch EQ 3-band/2-band Switch (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch) Switches between the displays of the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ for Parts 1–16. Settings: 3-band, 2-band EQ (Equalizer) Displays the 3-band EQ or the 2-band EQ depending on the “3-band/2-band” setting. Touching the button calls up the menu of Part EQ Edit. Rev Send (Reverb Send) Adjusts the Reverb send level of the selected Part 1–16. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 52 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Var Send (Variation Send) Adjusts the Variation send level of the selected Part 1–16. Home Settings: 0–127 Motion Control Dry Level Overview Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part 1–16. Quick Edit Settings: 0–127 Arpeggio Pan Motion Seq Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part 1–16. Super Knob Settings: L63–C–R63 Knob Auto Volume (Part Volume) Mixing Determines the output level of the selected Part 1–16. Scene Settings: 0–127 Play / Rec MIDI When “AD” Audio Part or “Digi” Digital Part is selected Audio Determines the Mixing setting of the Audio/Digital Part. A/D Part EQ A/D Part EQ (Audio Part Equalizer) Displays the 2-band parametric EQ. Touching the button calls up the menu of Common/Audio Part EQ Edit. A/D Part Rev Send (Audio Part Reverb Send) Digital Part Rev Send (Digital Part Reverb Send) Adjusts the Reverb send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part. Settings: 0–127 A/D Part Var Send (Audio Part Variation Send) Digital Part Var Send (Digital Part Variation Send) Adjusts the Variation send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part. Settings: 0–127 A/D Part Dry Level (Audio Part Dry Level) Digital Part Dry Level Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the Audio Part/Digital Part. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 53 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance A/D Part Pan (Audio Part Pan) Digital Part Pan Home Determines the stereo pan position of the Audio Part/Digital Part. Motion Control Settings: L63–C–R63 Overview A/D Volume (Audio Part Volume) Digital Part Volume Quick Edit Arpeggio Determines the output level of the Audio Part/Digital Part. Motion Seq Settings: 0–127 Super Knob Knob Auto When “Mst” (Master Part) is selected Mixing Determines the Master Mixing settings. Master EQ Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Master EQ (Master Equalizer) Displays the 5-band parametric EQ. Touching the button calls up the menu of Master EQ Edit. Rev Return (Reverb Return) Var Return (Variation Return) Determines the return level of the Reverb/Variation effect. Settings: 0–127 Pan (Performance Pan) Determines the stereo pan position of the entire Performance. This parameter offsets the same parameter in the Part Edit setting. Settings: L63–C–R63 Performance Volume Determines the output level of the entire Performance. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 54 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Scene Home With the Scene function, you can store all parameter settings such as Arpeggio type, Motion Sequencer type, and the Part parameter values together as a “Scene.” There are eight Scenes and you can select them by pressing the [SCENE] button. From the Scene display you can edit parameters related to the Scene function. When [Memory] is turned on for the function, the Motion Sequencer type, or the Arpeggio type, the corresponding function information is automatically memorized to the currently selected [SCENE] button. For information on how to use the Scene function, see the Owner’s Manual. NOTE You can also change Scene Settings from any other operation displays. To do this, set the parameter value available for the Scene by operating the corresponding Knob or Control Slider, and press one of the SCENE [1/ 5]–[4/8] buttons while holding down the [SHIFT] button. Scenes 1 to 8 are assigned to each button. Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Scene Play / Rec Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Scene] MIDI Audio Scene Select Switches Scenes by selecting tabs. This setting is applied to the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons on the panel. Settings: 1–8 Memory (Memorize Switch) Determines whether or not to memorize each parameter (such as Arpeggio, Motion Sequencer, Super Knob, Mixing, Amplitude EG, and Arp/MS FX) as a Scene. When this is off, the parameter is not displayed even when the corresponding tab is selected. Settings: Off, On When the “Arp/Motion Seq” tab is selected and both Memorize Switches for “Arp” and “Motion Seq” are set to ON Motion Seq Master (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Determines whether Motion Sequencer is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected Scene. Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Select (Motion Sequence Select) Determines the Motion Sequence type for the selected Scene. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Settings: 1–8 MODX Reference Manual 55 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is set to ON or OFF for the entire Performance in the selected Scene. Settings: Off, On Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Overview Determines the Arpeggio type for the selected Scene. Quick Edit Settings: 1–8 When the “Super Knob” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Super Knob (Super Knob Value) Determines the Super Knob Value for the selected Scene. Settings: 0–127 When the “Mixing 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON Rev Send (Reverb Send) Adjusts the Reverb Send level of each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 56 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Var Send (Variation Send) Adjusts the Variation Send level of each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: 0–127 Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Dry Level Overview Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound for each Part in the selected Scene. Quick Edit Settings: 0–127 Arpeggio Pan Motion Seq Determines the stereo pan position for each Part in the selected Scene. Super Knob Settings: L63–C–R63 Knob Auto Volume (Part Volume) Mixing Determines the volumes of each Part in the selected Scene. Scene Settings: 0–127 Play / Rec When the “Mixing 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON MIDI Audio Cutoff Determines the Cutoff frequency for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 Res (Resonance) Determines the resonance for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 FEG Depth Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of Cutoff Frequency) for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 Mute (Part Mute) Determines the Mute setting for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 57 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility When the “AEG” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Attack (AEG Attack Time) Determines the AEG Attack Time for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 Decay (AEG Decay Time) Determines the AEG Decay Time for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 Sustain (AEG Sustain Level) Determines the AEG Sustain Level for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 Release (AEG Release Time) Determines the AEG Release Time for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: -64 – +63 When the “Arp/MS FX 1” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON MODX Reference Manual 58 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Swing Determines the Swing setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about Swing, see “Quick Edit” (page 40). Settings: -120 – +120 Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Determines the Unit Multiply setting of Arpeggio and Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: 50%–400%, Common 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Gate Time (Gate Time Rate) Determines the Gate Time Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: 0%–200% Play / Rec MIDI Audio Velocity (Velocity Rate) Determines the Velocity Rate of Arpeggio for each Part in the selected Scene. Settings: 0%–200% When the “Arp/MS FX 2” tab is selected and the corresponding Memorize Switch is set to ON Amp (Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines the Amplitude of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about Amplitude, see “Quick Edit” (page 37). Settings: -64 – +63 Shape (Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Determines the Pulse Shape of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about Pulse Shape, see “Quick Edit” (page 37). Settings: -100 – +100 Smooth (Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the Smoothness of Motion Sequencer for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about Smoothness, see “Quick Edit” (page 38). Settings: -64 – +63 Random (Motion Sequencer Random) Determines the “Random” of Motion Sequence for each Part in the selected Scene. For details about Random, see “Quick Edit” (page 38). Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 59 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Play/Rec Home You can playback/record MIDI data as Songs on this instrument itself or playback/record your performance (audio data) on a USB flash drive. Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Play/Rec Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob MIDI Knob Auto From the MIDI display you can playback/record your keyboard performance with using the selected Performance to the Song. You can playback/record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing to the specified Track as MIDI events. Mixing Scene Play / Rec Playback and Playback Standby Operation MIDI Audio Press the [R] (Play) button or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI] Song Length Track Play Switch Song Name Indicates the selected Song name. Touching the Song Name calls up a menu for selecting Load, Rename, New Song and User Arpeggio. Performance Name Indicates the selected Performance Name. Click Settings Shows the Tempo settings display. Time Signature Indicates the meter of the Song. Position (Song Position) Determines the starting position of Recording/Playback. The indicator also shows the current position during playback. The measure’s number is in the left cell and the beat number and clocks are in the right cell. MODX Reference Manual 60 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Tempo Determines the Song tempo. Settings: 5–300 NOTE The tempo can be set as follows. [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [UTILITY] [Tempo Settings] (page 207) Store Song & Perf Settings Changes the Song tempo, Loop settings, and the Performance called back along with the Song to the current settings. This parameter is not available during: • New recording (No previously recorded Song data.) • Playback • Recording Standby • Recording Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec Loop MIDI Determines whether the Song plays through a single time or continuously. When this is set to on, the Song is repeatedly played back between the “Loop Start” and “Loop End” points (below). Audio Settings: Off, On Loop Start / End Determines the start position and the end position of Loop playback. The measure number is in the left cell and the beat number is in the right cell. This is not available when “Loop” is set to off. Save As .mid File Calls up the Store/Save display to save the Song as a file. This button is not available during: • New recording (No previously recorded Song data.) • Playback • Recording Standby • Recording • An external memory such as a USB flash drive is not connected. Song Length Indicates the length of the entire sequence. Track Play Switch Switches the playback for each track on/off. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 61 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Record and Record Standby Operation Press the [I] (Record) button or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI] [I] (Record) button Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Time Signature Determines the meter of the Song. Settings: 1/16–16/16, 1/8–16/8, 1/4–8/4 Rec Quantize (Record Quantize) Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real time. Record quantize aligns the timing of notes automatically, as you record. Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note), Off Record Type Determines the Recording Type. This parameter is not available for the first recording. Settings: Replace, Overdub, Punch Replace: You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded Track with new data in real time. The original data will be erased. Overdub: You can use this method when you want to add more data to a Track that already contains data. Previously recorded data will be maintained. Punch: You can use this method when you want to overwrite data to a specified range of a Track that already contains data. It allows you to overwrite the already recorded data from the starting point to the ending point (measure/beat) that was specified before recording. Punch In Determines the starting point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when “punch” is selected for “Record Type.” Punch Out Determines the ending point (measure and beat) for recording. This parameter is available only when “punch” is selected for “Record Type.” NOTE For details about the Punch In/Out setting, see the Owner’s Manual. Undo The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, restoring the data to its previous state. Redo Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them. MODX Reference Manual 62 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Put Track to Arpeggio This function copies data in the specified measures of a track for creating Arpeggio data. Up to 16 unique note numbers can be recorded to the Arpeggio track. If more than 16 different note numbers have been recorded to the MIDI sequence data, the Convert operation reduces the notes in excess of the limit. Because of this, be careful to record only up to 16 different notes when you create an Arpeggio, especially when using multiple tracks. Operation [R] (PLAY) button or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [MIDI] Touch the Song Name to call up the menu [User Arp] in the menu Live Set Performance Home Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Arp (Arpeggio Number) Determines the User Arpeggio number. One of the numbers currently not in use is automatically assigned by default. When a number already in use is selected, the previous Arpeggio data in the selected number will be overwritten. Settings: 1–256 Category (Arpeggio Category) Determines the Category setting (Main Category and Sub Category) for the created Arpeggio data. Settings: Refer to the Arpeggio Type Category List in the Reference Manual PDF document. Name (Arpeggio Name) Determines the User Arpeggio name. The Arpeggio name can contain up to 20 characters. Song Track Determines the track of the source Song for each Arpeggio track. Convert Type Determines how the MIDI sequence data (of Song tracks) will be converted to Arpeggio data from the three ways below. This parameter can be set for each track. Settings: Normal, Fixed, Org Notes Normal: The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes. Fixed: Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data. Org Notes (original notes): Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ according to the played chord. Original Notes Root Determines the root note when the Convert Type of any track is set to “Org Notes.” This is available only when any track is set to “Org Notes.” Settings: C-2 – G8 MODX Reference Manual 63 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Performance Measure Determines the range of measures to be copied to the Arpeggio data. Settings: 001–999 Home Motion Control Store As User Arp (Store As User Arpeggio) Overview Stores as User Arpeggio following all settings made in this display. This is not available when all tracks are set to off. Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Audio Knob Auto From the Audio display you can record your performance on the instrument as WAV format (44.1-kHz, 24-bit, stereo) audio files to a USB flash drive. It is possible to record continuously for up to 74 minutes (assuming that the USB storage device has sufficient free memory). Scene Play / Rec MIDI Playback and Playback Standby Operation Mixing Audio [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [Audio] Current play position in the entire audio data Level meter Audio Name Indicates the name of the selected Audio file. Position (Audio Position) Determines the starting position of Playback. The indicator also shows the current position during playback. Audio Volume Determines the volume of the Audio Playback. This parameter cannot be changed during recording. Settings: 0–255 Audio Length Indicates the length of the entire audio data. Level Meter Indicates the Audio Input/Output level. MODX Reference Manual 64 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Record and Record Standby Live Set Performance Home Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Play/Rec] [Audio] [I] (Record) button Motion Control Overview Quick Edit Arpeggio Motion Seq Super Knob Knob Auto Mixing Scene Play / Rec MIDI Audio Recordable (Audio Recordable Time) Indicates available recording time. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby. Trigger Level Determines the method of starting recording. This parameter is displayed only during recording standby. If you set the trigger level to “manual,” recording will begin whenever you press the [R] (Play) button. Alternatively, if you set a value between 1 and 127, recording will begin automatically whenever the [R] (Play) button is pressed and the playback volume exceeds that level. The level set here will be indicated by blue triangles in the level meter. For best results, set this parameter as low as possible to capture the entire signal, but not so low as to record unwanted noise. Settings: manual, 1–127 MODX Reference Manual 65 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common A Normal Part (AWM2) (having pitched musical instrument sounds) can consist of up to eight Elements. An Element is the basic, smallest unit for a Part. There are two types of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit displays: Element Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Elements; and Element Edit display, for editing individual Elements. Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Element Common Edit (Common) Zone Transmit Effect Routing Part Settings Ins A Ins B EQ General Ins Assign From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings] [General] Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Part Category Main (Part Main Category) Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category) Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Part Name Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Volume (Part Volume) Determines the output level of the selected Part. Settings: 0–127 Copy or Exchange Elements Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part. Settings: L63–C–R63 MODX Reference Manual 66 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Dry Level Determines the dry sound level (without effect processing) of the selected Part. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Settings: 0–127 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Var Send (Variation Send) Pitch Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Zone Settings Settings: 0–127 Zone Transmit Effect Rev Send (Reverb Send) Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Settings: 0–127 Part Output (Part Output Select) Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2...USB7&8, USB1...USB8, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1...8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Mono/Poly Common Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for the selected Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, and polyphonic is for playing multiple simultaneous notes. Lane Settings: Mono, Poly Mod / Control Part LFO Key Assign (Key Assign Mode) Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without corresponding note off messages. For details, refer to the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Settings: Single, Multi Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next note will be sounded. Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay). Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Settings: Off, On Element Pan (Element Pan Switch) Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Element (made via ([EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] [Level/Pan] “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position for each Element in the Part is set to center. Settings: Off, On Velocity Limit Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” For instructions on setting the Velocity Limit, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Settings: 1–127 Note Limit Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Settings: C -2 – G8 MODX Reference Manual 67 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as shown below). Settings: 0–127 Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio When Offset (below) is set to 64: Depth=127 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) Depth=64 Common Part Settings Depth=32 General Pitch Depth=0 0 127 Velocity with which you play a note Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate for playing too strongly or too softly. Settings: 0–127 Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 32 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 0 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 64 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 96 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control You can select a Part with touch operations within these displays: Normal Part (AWM2) Edit, Drum Part Edit, Normal Part (FM-X) Edit, and Common/Audio Edit. These instructions show an example display of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit. Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Part Element Shows a currently selected Part. By touching a Part, a pop-up list appears, and then you can select a different Part for editing. Osc / Tune Settings: Common, Part 1–16 Pitch EG Filter Type Pitch Filter EG From the Pitch display you can set Pitch-related parameters for the Part. Scale Amplitude Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings] [Pitch] Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 68 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch) Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the first note played on the keyboard to the next. The Portamento Master Switch determines whether Portamento is applied to the entire Performance or not. Settings: Off, On Portamento Part SW (Portamento Part Switch) Determines whether Portamento is applied to the selected Part or not. Settings: Off, On Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Portamento Mode Determines the Portamento mode. Settings: Fingered, Full-time Fingered: Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). Full-time: Portamento is applied to all notes. Portamento Time Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied. Common Settings: 0–127 Individual Portamento Time Mode Advanced Determines how the pitch changes in time. Settings: Rate 1, Time 1, Rate 2, Time 2 Rate 1: Pitch changes at the specified rate. Time 1: Pitch changes in the specified time. Rate 2: Pitch changes at the specified rate within an octave. Time 2: Pitch changes in the specified time within an octave. Portamento Legato Slope Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when “Mono/Poly” is set to “Mono.” (Legato notes “overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.) Settings: 0–7 Note Shift Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones. Settings: -24 – +0 – +24 Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Detune Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments. Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower) Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones. Settings: -48 – +0 – +24 Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Micro Tuning Name Determines the tuning system for the selected Part. For information on the various tuning systems, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Settings: Equal Temperament, Pure Major, Pure Minor, Werckmeister, Kirnberger, Vallotti & Young, 1/4 shift, 1/4 tone, 1/8 tone, Indian, Arabic 1, Arabic 2, Arabic 3, User 1–8 (when the User Bank is selected), Library 1-1 – 8-8 (when the Library file is read) Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Micro Tuning Root Determines the root note for the Micro Tuning function. This root note setting may not be necessary depending on the “Micro Tuning Name” type. Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: C–B MODX Reference Manual 69 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Edit User Tuning Calls up the User Micro Tuning Setting display. Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Tuning No. (Micro Tuning Number) Indicates the selected User Micro Tuning Number. Settings: 1–8 Tuning Name (Micro Tuning Name) Determines the name of the selected User Micro Tuning. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element C, C#, D, D#, E, F, F#, G, G#, A, A#, B Osc / Tune Adjusts the pitch of each note in 1 cent steps determines the Micro Tuning. Pitch EG Settings: -99 – +99 Filter Initialize Type Initializes the selected User Micro Tuning. Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 70 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Zone Settings From the Zone Setting display you can set Zone-related parameters. You can divide the keyboard into a maximum of eight independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone can be assigned different MIDI channels. This makes it possible to control several Parts of the multi-timbral tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control Parts of an external MIDI instrument over several different channels in addition to the internal Parts of this synthesizer itself—letting you use the MODX to effectively do the work of several keyboards. To activate this display, select [UTILITY] [Settings] [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.” For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings] [Zone Settings] Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Zone (Zone Switch) Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). When this is set to off, all of the following parameters are not available. Settings: Off, On Int SW (Internal Switch) Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Determines whether MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard in the range of the selected Zone are transmitted to the internal tone generator or not. Level / Pan Settings: Off, On Scale Transmit Ch (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for the selected Zone. Settings: Ch1–Ch16, Off Note Limit Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for the selected Zone. The selected Zone will sound only when you play notes within this range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Settings: C -2 – G8 Octave Shift Amp EG Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. You can adjust the offset up or down over a maximum range of three octaves. Settings: -3 – +0 (Default) – +3 Transpose Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. Settings: -11 – +0 (Default) – +11 MODX Reference Manual 71 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select) Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off. Settings: Off, On Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change) Pitch Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off. Zone Settings Settings: Off, On Zone Transmit Effect Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression) Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off. Settings: Off, On Pan (Transmit Pan) Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off. Settings: Off, On MIDI Bank MSB/LSB (Bank Select MSB/LSB) Determines the Bank numbers to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance. The Bank consists of MSB and LSB values. This is not available when “Transmit Bank Select” is set to off. Settings: 000–127 MIDI Pgm Num (Program Change Number) Determines the Program Change Number to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance. This is not available when the “Transmit Program Change” is set to off. Settings: 001–128 MIDI Volume Determines the transmit volume to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance. This is not available when the Transmit Volume/Expression is set to “off”. Settings: 0–127 Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter MIDI Pan Type Determines the Pan to be transmitted to the external tone generator when selecting the Performance. This is not available when the Transmit Pan is set to “off.” Filter EG Settings: L64–C–R63 Scale Amplitude MIDI Send By turning this parameter on, MIDI Bank, MIDI Pgm Number, MIDI Volume, or MIDI Pan is transmitted to the external tone generator depending on the setting of the Transmit Switch. This is not available when the Transmit Channel is set to off or when all of the four Transmit Switches are set to off. Settings: Off, On Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 72 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Zone Transmit From the Zone Transmit display you can set how each individual zone affects transmission of various MIDI data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” playing the selected zone will transmit the corresponding MIDI data. All settings made in this display are not available when “Transmit Ch” is set to “Off” in the Zone Setting display. To activate this display, select [UTILITY] [Settings] [Advanced], then set “Zone Master” to “ON.” For details, refer to the Owner’s Manual. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Part Settings] [Zone Transmit] Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Pgm Change (Transmit Program Change) Determines whether Program Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Settings: Off, On Bank Select (Transmit Bank Select) Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Pitch Bend (Transmit Pitch Bend) Determines whether Pitch Bend messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Settings: Off, On CC (Transmit Control Change) Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Determines whether Control Change messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. Osc Settings: Off, On Balance Vol/Exp (Transmit Volume/Expression) Determines whether volume messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On Copy or Exchange Elements Pan (Transmit Pan) Determines whether Pan messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 73 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio MW (Transmit Modulation Wheel) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On Sustain (Transmit Sustain) Determines whether Sustain messages are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On FC1/FC2 (Transmit Fool Controller) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On FS (Transmit Foot Switch) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq A. SW1/A. SW2 (Transmit Assignable Switch) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On MS Hold (Transmit Motion Sequencer Hold) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On MS Trigger (Transmit Motion Sequencer Trigger) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude A.Knob1–8 (Transmit Assignable Knob) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) are transmitted to the external tone generator or not. This is not available when the Transmit Control Change is set to off. Settings: Off, On Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 74 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Effect Common Part Settings Routing General From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts. Pitch Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [Routing] Ins FX SW Insertion FX A Switch Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Insertion FX B Switch Osc / Tune Pitch EG Element 1–8 (Element Connection Switch) Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “Thru” setting lets you bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element. Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B) Filter Type Filter EG Scale Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch) Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not. For Parts 9-16, the Ins FX SW is shown at the center of the page, and the Insertion effect of the currently being edited Part can be switched ON or OFF. Settings: Off, On Category (Effect Category) Type (Effect Type) Determines the category and type for the selected Effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Preset Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed settings. Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 75 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the particular Effect Type. Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part. Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.” Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA Rev Send (Reverb Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Settings: 0–127 Var Send (Variation Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Settings: 0–127 Common Part Output (Part Output Select) Lane Determines the specific audio output. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2…7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1…8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Envelope Follower Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details on the Envelope Follower, see the “Envelope Follower Block” (page 21) in the “Basic Structure.” Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements Part (Input Source) Displays the Part as “Input Source” for the selected Envelope Follower. Settings: Master, AD, Part 1–Part 16 MODX Reference Manual 76 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Gain (Envelope Follower Gain) Determines the Input gain of the Input Source set in “Part.” Settings: -24dB – 0dB – +24dB Common Part Settings Attack (Envelope Follower Attack) General Determines the attack time of the Envelope Follower. Pitch Settings: 1ms–40ms Zone Settings Release (Envelope Follower Release) Zone Transmit Determines the release time of the Envelope Follower. Effect Settings: 10ms–680ms Routing Input Level Ins A Indicates the Input Level of the signal from the Input Source set in “Part.” Ins B EQ Envelope Follower Output Ins Assign Indicates the Output Level of the Envelope Follower. Arpeggio Edit Common Calls up the Control Assign display for the Destination Part. Individual Advanced Motion Seq Ins A (Insertion Effect A) Ins B (Insertion Effect B) Common Lane From the Insertion Effect A/Insertion Effect B display you can set parameters related to Insertion Effect. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [Ins A] / [Ins B] Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Insertion FX Switch Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Effect Parameter Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch) Copy or Exchange Elements Determines whether the selected Insertion Effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 77 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Category (Effect Category) Type (Effect Type) Common Determines the category and type for the selected Insertion Effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Part Settings General Pitch Preset Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed settings. Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect types, see the Data List PDF document. Routing Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Ins A The Side Chain/Modulator uses the output from one track to control an effect in a different track. You can specify the Effect type for activating the feature so that input signals for Parts other than the selected Part or the audio input signal can control the specified Effect. This may not be active depending on the particular Effect Type. Here you can determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part. Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Individual Effect Parameter Advanced Active Effect parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect parameters, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO EQ (Part Equalizer) Control Assign From the Part Equalizer display you can set parameters related to Part EQ. Receive SW Element Part 3-band EQ Part EQ Insertion Effect Osc / Tune 2-band EQ Part EQ Pitch EG Filter Type Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [EQ] Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 78 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) 3-band EQ / 2-band EQ (3-band EQ/2-band EQ Switch) Switches displays between 3-band EQ and 2-band EQ. Settings: 3-band EQ, 2-band EQ When “3-band EQ” is selected From this display you can make 3-band EQ settings. Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO EQ Low Gain (3-band EQ Low Gain) Determines the level gain of the Low band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB EQ Mid Gain (3-band EQ Middle Gain) Determines the level gain of the Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type EQ Hi Gain (3-band EQ High Gain) Determines the level gain of the High band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Filter EG Scale Amplitude EQ Low Freq (3-band EQ Low Frequency) Level / Pan Determines the frequency for the Low band. Amp EG Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz EQ Mid Freq (3-band EQ Middle Frequency) Determines the frequency for the Mid band. Settings: 139.7Hz–10.1kHz Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element EQ Hi Freq (3-band EQ High Frequency) Osc Determines the frequency for the High band. Balance Settings: 503.8Hz–14.0kHz EQ Mid Q (3-band EQ Middle Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Mid band. Settings: 0.7–10.3 MODX Reference Manual Copy or Exchange Elements 79 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) When “2-band EQ” is selected Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit From this display you can make 2-band EQ settings. Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common EQ1 Type (2-band EQ1 Type)/EQ2 Type (2-band EQ2 Type) Determines the Equalizer Type. Mod / Control Settings: Thru, LPF, HPF, Low Shelf, Hi Shelf, Peak/Dip Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected. LPF/HPF: This setting only passes signals below or above the Cutoff Frequency. Low Shelf/Hi Shelf: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting Low Shelf + Lane Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element High Shelf Gain + Frequency Osc / Tune Gain Frequency Pitch EG Filter 0 0 – – Type Filter EG Frequency Frequency Scale Amplitude Peak/Dip: This setting attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting. + Gain Level / Pan Amp EG Frequency Scale Element LFO 0 Frequency – Element EQ All Element Osc EQ 1 Gain (2-band EQ1 Gain)/EQ 2 Gain (2-band EQ2 Gain) Balance Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ1 Freq” or “EQ2 Freq.” This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru,” “LPF,” or “HPF.” Settings: -12dB – +12dB EQ 1 Freq (2-band EQ1 Frequency)/EQ 2 Freq (2-band EQ2 Frequency) Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted. This is not active when “EQ Type” is set to “Thru.” Settings: 63Hz–18.0Hz MODX Reference Manual 80 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio EQ 1 Q (2-band EQ1 Q)/EQ 2 Q (2-band EQ2 Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth for the frequency which is set in “EQ 1 Freq/EQ2 Freq.” This is available only when “EQ Type” is set to “Peak/Dip.” Settings: 0.1–12.0 NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Output Level (2-band Output Level) Determines the Output level of the 2-band EQ. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins Assign (Insertion Assign) In the Insertion Assign display, you can set the Insertion Effect for Parts 9–16. Ins A Ins B EQ Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Effect] [Ins Assign] Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Active (Active Part) Amplitude Shows the number of Parts with the Ins FX SW set to ON. The number that follows the slash (/) sign is the maximum number of Insertion Effects that can be simultaneously set to ON. Level / Pan Part9–Part16 Scale Sets the Insertion Effect for Parts 9-16 ON or OFF. Settings: Off, On NOTE The Insertion Effect for Parts 1–8 is always ON. Amp EG Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 81 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Arpeggio Common Part Settings Common General From the Common display you can set Arpeggio-related parameters for the Part. Pitch Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Arpeggio] [Common] Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Determines whether the Arpeggio for the selected Part is active or not. Settings: Off, On Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Type Determines whether the Arpeggio for the entire Performance is active or not. Filter EG Settings: Off, On Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the Arpeggios for Parts are being played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you trigger it. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution in clocks. Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ Hold Determines whether the Arpeggio continues cycling after the keys are released. Settings: Sync-off, Off, On Sync-off: Arpeggio playback continues to run silently, even when you release the keys. Pressing any key turns Arpeggio playback on again, and the Arpeggio is heard from the point in the cycle where playback is resumed. All Element Osc Balance Off: The Arpeggio plays only while you hold the keys. On: The Arpeggio cycles automatically, even if you release your fingers from the keys. Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 82 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Key Mode Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard. Settings: Sort, Thru, Direct, Sort+Drct, Thru+Drct Sort: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the same sequence plays, no matter what Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings order you play the notes. General Thru: When you play specific notes (for example, the notes of a chord), the resulting sequence differs depending on Pitch the order of the notes. Direct: Note events of the Arpeggio sequence do not play; only the notes you play on the keyboard are heard. When the Arpeggio plays back, events such as Pan and Brightness are applied to the sound of your keyboard performance. Use this setting when the Arpeggio types include non-note data or when you set the Arpeggio Category to Control. Sort+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Sort setting, and the notes played are also sounded. Thru+Drct: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Thru setting, and the notes played are also sounded. Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Velocity (Velocity Rate) Ins B Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127. EQ Settings: 0%–200% Ins Assign Arpeggio Gate Time (Gate Time Rate) Common Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1. Individual Settings: 0%–200% Advanced Motion Seq Change Timing Common Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during Arpeggio playback. When set to “Real-time,” the Arpeggio type is switched immediately. When set to “Measure,” the Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure. Lane Settings: Real-time, Measure Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Loop Receive SW Determines whether the Arpeggio plays through a single time or continuously, while notes are held. Settings: Off, On Element Osc / Tune Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Pitch EG Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Filter Settings: Off, On Type Filter EG Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid) Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Qntz Strength (Quantize Strength) This parameter sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the quantize beat set in “Arp/MS Grid.” A setting of 100% produces exact timing set in “Arp/MS Grid.” A setting of 0% results in no quantization. Settings: 0%–100% Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time. By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio from the original one. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200%, 266%, 300%, 400%, Common 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. MODX Reference Manual Copy or Exchange Elements 83 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Swing Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. • +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes. • -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes. • 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing. Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce. Settings: -120 – +120 Velocity Limit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Arpeggio responds. Each Arpeggio will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” Routing Settings: 1–127 EQ Note Limit (Arpeggio Note Limit) Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio’s note range. Each Arpeggio will only sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Settings: C -2 – G8 Octave Shift (Arpeggio Output Octave Shift) Ins A Ins B Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio up or down in octaves. Common Settings: -10 – +0 – +10 Lane Octave Range (Arpeggio Octave Range) Mod / Control Specifies the maximum Arpeggio range in octaves. Part LFO Settings: -3 – +0 – +3 Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 84 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Individual Common From the Individual display you can set parameters corresponding to Arpeggio Selects 1–8. Touching the Arpeggio Type Setting calls up a menu. In the displayed menu, touch [Search] to call up the Arpeggio Category Search display (page 180) and touch [Number] to determine the Arpeggio Type by specifying the Arpeggio Number. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Arpeggio] [Individual] Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Arpeggio Type Settings Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Same as in the Common display. Arp (Arpeggio Select) Selects the desired Arpeggio stored as Arpeggio Select. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Arpeggios. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios” (page 86). Settings: 1–8 Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Category (Arpeggio Category) Indicates the selected Arpeggio Category. Settings: See the “Arpeggio Category List” on page 11. Element LFO Element EQ All Element Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category) Osc Indicates the selected Arpeggio Sub Category. Balance Settings: See the “Arpeggio Sub Category List” on page 11. Name (Arpeggio Name) Indicates the selected Arpeggio Name. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Copy or Exchange Elements Velocity (Velocity Rate) Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. If the resulting Velocity value is 0, it will be set to 1. If the resulting Velocity value is greater than 128 it will be set to 127. Settings: -100% – +100% MODX Reference Manual 85 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Gate Time (Gate Time Rate) Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. If the resulting Gate Time value is 0, it will be set to 1. Settings: -100% – +100% Common Part Settings General Pitch Copying or Exchanging Arpeggios Zone Settings You can copy or exchange between Arpeggio types. Operation Zone Transmit [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Select Part to be copied [Arpeggio] [Individual] [SHIFT] + [EDIT] or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Arpeggio] Select Part to be copied [SHIFT] + [EDIT] Copy Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Exchange Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced 1 3 Motion Seq Common Lane 2 4 Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type NOTE You can select “All” for Arp Select when copying between different Parts. Filter EG Scale Copy Amplitude Touching this button activates the Arpeggio Type Copy function. Level / Pan Exchange Amp EG Touching this button activates the Arpeggio Type Exchange function. Scale 1 Part to be copied (or exchanged) NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed. 2 Arpeggio Select to be copied (or exchanged) 3 Copy (or exchange) destination Part Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance 4 Copy (or exchange) destination Arpeggio Select Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 86 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Advanced Common From the Advanced display you can set advanced parameters related to the Arpeggio function. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Arpeggio] [Advanced] Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Arp Part (Part Arpeggio Switch) Arp Master (Arpeggio Master Switch) Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Same as in the Common display. Accent Vel Threshold (Accent Velocity Threshold) Determines the minimum velocity that will trigger the Accent Phrase. Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold parameter. If it is difficult to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “Accent Vel Threshold” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value. NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the Data List PDF document. Settings: off, 1–127 Accent Start Quantize Determines the start timing of the Accent Phrase when the Velocity specified in Accent Velocity Threshold above is received. When this is set to off, the Accent Phrase starts as soon as the Velocity is received. When this is set to on, the Accent Phrase starts on the beat specified for each Arpeggio type after the Velocity is received. Settings: off, on Random SFX Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Determines whether Random SFX is active or not. Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar fret noises) when the note is released. NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the Data List PDF document. Settings: off, on Copy or Exchange Elements Random SFX Velocity Offset Determines the offset value by which the Random SFX notes will be shifted from their original velocities. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 MODX Reference Manual 87 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Random SFX Key On Ctrl (Random SFX Key On Control) When this is set to “on,” the Random SFX sound is played at the velocity generated by the playing of each note. When this is set to “off,” a special Random SFX sound is played at a pre-programmed velocity. Settings: off, on Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Velocity Mode Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes. Settings: Original, Thru Original: The Arpeggio plays back at the Velocity set for the Arpeggio Type. Thru: The Arpeggio plays back according to the Velocity of your playing. Trigger Mode When this is set to “Gate,” pressing the note starts Arpeggio playback and releasing the note stops it. When this is set to “Toggle,” pressing the note starts/stops Arpeggio playback and releasing the note does not affect Arpeggio playback. Settings: Gate, Toggle Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Individual Advanced Common Motion Seq From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer for the Part. Common Lane Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Motion Seq] [Common] Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Common Clock Swing (Common Swing) Balance Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part. Settings: -120 – +120 Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Copy or Exchange Elements Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance. This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer of the Part is set to “Common.” By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one. Settings: 50%–400% 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. MODX Reference Manual 88 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time) Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part. Settings: -100% – +100% Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Pitch Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part. Zone Settings Settings: -100% – +100% Zone Transmit Effect Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Settings: -64 – +63 Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step curve shape of the sequence. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter). Settings: -100 – +100 Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Settings: -64 – +63 Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random) Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Type Settings: -64 – +63 Scale Filter EG Amplitude Part Clock Swing (Clock Swing) Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This parameter delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. • +1 and higher: Delay the Arpeggio notes. • -1 and lower: Advance the Arpeggio notes. • 0: Exact timing as set by “Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid” Value, resulting in no swing. Judicious use of this setting lets you create swing rhythms and triplet feels, such as shuffle and bounce. Settings: -120 – +120 Part Clock Unit (Part Unit Multiply) Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance This adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Part. Settings: 50%–400%, Common 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. MODX Reference Manual Copy or Exchange Elements 89 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Part Arp Gate Time (Part Arpeggio Gate Time) Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate (page 86) of each Arpeggio Select setting. Settings: 0%–200% Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Part Arp Velocity (Part Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Pitch Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate (page 85) of each Arpeggio Select setting. Zone Settings Settings: 0%–200% Zone Transmit Effect Part Motion Seq Amplitude (Part Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Amplitude (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Settings: -64 – +63 Part Motion Seq Shape (Part Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq “Step Curve Parameter” (page 94) when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter. Settings: -100 – +100 Part Motion Seq Smooth (Part Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. This is the offset value for the Lane Motion Seq Smoothness (page 93) when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Settings: -64 – +63 Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Part Motion Seq Random (Part Motion Sequencer Random) Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part. “Random” is the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. Settings: 0–127 Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid) Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 90 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Lane Common From the Lane display you can set parameters for each Lane of the Motion Sequencer. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Motion Seq] [Lane] Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Motion Seq Master SW (Motion Sequencer Master Switch) Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance is active or not. Settings: Off, On Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Motion Seq Part SW (Motion Sequencer Part Switch) Determines whether the Motion Sequencer for the selected Part is active or not. Settings: Off, On Pitch EG Filter Type Lane SW (Lane Switch) Determines whether each Lane is active or not. Up to four Lanes of Motion Sequencer can be used for one Part and up to eight Lanes can be used at the same time for the entire Performance. When this is set to off, parameters related to the corresponding Lane will not be displayed. Settings: Off, On MS FX (Lane Motion Sequencer FX Receive) Determines whether or not the selected Lane is affected by Knob operations when the “ARP/MS” is selected with the Knob Function [TONE]/[EG/FX]/[EQ]/[ARP/MS] button. Settings: Off, On Trigger (Lane Motion Sequencer Trigger Receive) Determines whether or not the selected Lane receives the signal generated by [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button. When this is set to on, the Motion Sequence will begin whenever you press the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button. Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Settings: Off, On Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select) Selects the desired Motion Sequence. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: 1–8 MODX Reference Manual 91 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Sync (Lane Motion Sequencer Sync) Determines if the playback of the Motion Sequence applied to the Destination (set in the Control Assign display (page 100)) is synchronized to the Tempo, Beat, or Arpeggio of the Performance. Settings: Off, Tempo, Beat, Arp, Lane 1 (when Lane 2–4 is selected) Off: Lane Motion Sequencer plays back according to its own clock and is not synchronized to an external clock. Tempo: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Performance tempo. Beat: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the beat. Arp: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the 1st beat of the measure of the currently playing Arpeggio. Lane 1: Lane Motion Sequencer is synchronized with the Lane 1. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Speed (Lane Motion Sequencer Speed) Routing Determines the playback speed of the Motion Sequence. This is available only when the “Lane Motion Sequencer Sync” is set to “Off.” Ins A Settings: 0–127 Ins B EQ Unit Multiply (Lane Motion Sequencer Unit Multiply) Adjusts the Motion Sequencer playback time for the selected Lane. This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Off” and “Lane 1.” Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Settings: 50%–6400%, Common, Arp 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common: The value set in the Unit Multiply common to the all Parts will be applied. Arp: The value set in the Arpeggio Unit Multiply for the selected Part will be applied. Motion Seq Key On Reset (Lane Motion Sequencer Key On Reset) Mod / Control Determines whether or not the playback of the Motion Sequence is stopped when you play the keyboard. This parameter is active when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Arp” and “Lane 1.” Also this parameter is not available when “Trigger” is set to “On.” Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Each-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequence from the beginning. 1st-On: The Sequence resets with each note you play and starts the Sequencer from the beginning. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the Sequence continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the Sequence only resets if the first note is released before the second is played. Loop (Lane Motion Sequencer Loop) Determines whether the Motion Sequence is played only once or repeatedly. This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.” Settings: Off, On Velocity Limit (Lane Motion Sequencer Velocity Limit) Determines the minimum and maximum Velocity values in which the Motion Sequence responds. This is available when the Lane Motion Sequencer Sync parameter is set to something other than “Lane 1.” Settings: 1–127 Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle) Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 Load Sequence Individual Advanced Common Lane Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Loads Motion Sequence data in the User Memory. For details about Loading, see “Load” (page 198). Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 92 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Edit Sequence Calls up the Motion Sequence setting display. You can create a custom Sequence consisting of up to sixteen steps. Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value) Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type) Part LFO Control Assign Lane (Current Select Lane) Indicates the currently selected Lane. This parameter is not displayed when the corresponding Lane Switch is set to off. Settings: 1–4 Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Cycle (Lane Motion Sequencer Cycle) Selects the desired step length for the Motion Sequence. Settings: 1–16 Filter Type Filter EG Amplitude (Lane Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes. Settings: 0–127 Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Smooth (Lane Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Amp EG Determines the smoothness of the time change of the Motion Sequence. Scale Settings: 0–127 Sequence Select (Lane Motion Sequence Select) Determines the Motion Sequence Select. By selecting a type and pressing [SHIFT] + [EDIT], you can copy or exchange Motion Sequences. For details, see “Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences” (page 95). Settings: 1–8 Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Polarity (Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity) Determines the Sequence Polarity. Settings: Unipolar, Bipolar Unipolar: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction from a base parameter value according to the Sequence. Bipolar: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value. Copy or Exchange Elements Motion Seq Step Value (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Value) Determines the Step Value for the Motion Sequence. You can control the Step Value 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 or 13– 16 by the Control Sliders 1–4 (5–8 / 9–12 / 13–16) depending on the cursor position on the display. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 93 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Motion Seq Step Type (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Type) Determines each Step Type of the Motion Sequence. You can switch between the Step Types A and B for the Step 1–8 or 9–16 by the SCENE [1/5]–[4/8] buttons depending on the cursor position on the display. Settings: A, B Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pulse A / Pulse B (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Type) Pitch Determines the Curve Type of the parameter for each of “Pulse A” and “Pulse B.” “Motion Seq Step Type” described above determines which curve set here is used for each step. Zone Settings Settings: For Preset Bank: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Zone Transmit Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold For details, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. For User Bank: User 1–32 When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8 Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Direction (Lance Motion Sequencer Step Curve Direction) Determines the Direction of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence. Settings: Forward, Reverse EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Prm1/Prm2 (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Parameter) Adjusts the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence. This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Also the range of available parameter values differs depending on the Curve Type. Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Control (Lane Motion Sequencer Step Curve Shape Control Switch) Determines whether or not to control the shape of the Step Curve for the Motion Sequence by operating Knobs. This parameter is displayed only when “MS FX” is set to on. Also this parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. Settings: Off, On Store Sequence Stores the edited Sequence data. For details about storing data, see “Store/Save” (page 201). Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 94 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio Copying or Exchanging Motion Sequences Normal Part (AWM2) Edit You can copy or exchange between Motion Sequences. Operation Live Set Common [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Select Part to be copied [Motion Seq] [Lane] [SHIFT] + [EDIT] or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Motion Seq] Select Part to be copied [SHIFT] + [EDIT] or [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [Motion Control] [Knob Auto] [SHIFT] + [EDIT] Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Copy Routing Exchange Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign 1 4 Arpeggio Common Individual 2 5 Advanced Motion Seq Common 3 6 Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune NOTE You can select “All” for “Lane” and “MS Select” when copying between different Parts. Pitch EG Copy Filter Touching this button activates the Motion Sequence Copy function. Type Filter EG Exchange Touching this button activates the Motion Sequence Exchange function. 1 Part to be copied (or exchanged) NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed. 2 Lane to be copied (or exchanged) Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO 3 Motion Sequence Select to be copied (or exchanged) 4 Copy (or exchange) destination Part Element EQ All Element Osc 5 Copy (or exchange) destination Lane Balance 6 Copy (or exchange) destination Motion Sequence Select Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 95 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Mod/Control (Modulation/Control) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings Part LFO General From the Part LFO display you can set the LFO-related parameters for the Part. Pitch Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control] [Part LFO] Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element LFO Wave Osc / Tune Selects the LFO waveform. Pitch EG Settings: Triangle, Triangle+, Saw Up, Saw Down, Squ1/4, Squ1/3, Square, Squ2/3, Squ3/4, Trapezoid, S/H1, S/H2, User Filter Tempo Sync (LFO Tempo Sync) Type Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or Song. Filter EG Settings: Off (not synchronized), On (synchronized) Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 96 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio When “Tempo Sync” is set to “OFF” Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Speed (LFO Speed) Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. This is not available when the Tempo Sync parameter is set to “On.” Settings: 0–63 Random Speed (LFO Random Speed Depth) Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random. Settings: 0–127 Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element When “Tempo Sync” is set to “ON” Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Tempo Speed (LFO Tempo Speed) Copy or Exchange Elements This parameter is available only when “Tempo Sync” above has been set to “ON.” It allows you to make detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio. Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 1/4 x 32 (32 quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 64 (64 quarter notes to the beat) MODX Reference Manual 97 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Delay (LFO Delay Time) Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–127 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Fade In (LFO Fade In Time) Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed). Settings: 0–127 Hold (LFO Hold Time) Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level. Routing Settings: 0–126, Hold Hold: No fade-out Ins A Ins B Fade Out (LFO Fade Out Time) Determines the time over which the LFO effect is faded out (after the “Hold” time has elapsed). Settings: 0–127 EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset) Common Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. Individual Settings: Off, Each-On, 1st-On Each-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase Advanced parameter. 1st-On: The LFO resets with each note you play and starts a waveform at the phase specified by the Phase parameter. If you play a second note while the first is being held, the LFO continues cycling according to the same phase as triggered by the first note—in other words, the LFO only resets if the first note is released before the second is played. Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Loop (LFO Loop) Part LFO Determines whether the LFO Wave plays through a single time (off) or continuously (on). Control Assign Settings: Off, On Phase (LFO Phase) Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset. Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270° Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset) Determines the offset values of the “Phase” parameter (above) for the respective Elements. Settings: 0°, 90°, 120°, 180°, 240°, 270° Type Filter EG Scale Destination (LFO Destination) Determines the functions which will be controlled by the LFO Wave. Settings: Insertion Effect A Parameter 1–24, Insertion Effect B Parameter 1–24, Level, Pitch, Cutoff, Resonance, Pan, E.LFO Speed Depth (LFO Depth) Set the LFO Wave Depth (amplitude) for “Destination” parameter (above). Settings: 0–127 Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Element Depth Ratio (LFO Element Depth Ratio) Determines the offset values of the “Depth” parameter (above) for the respective Elements. When set to “Off,” the LFO effect is not available. This is available only when Element-related parameters are set in “Destination.” Osc Balance Settings: Off, 0–127 Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 98 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Edit User LFO Calls up the User LFO Setting display. You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of up to sixteen steps. User LFO Step Value Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Cycle Part LFO Selects the desired step length for the LFO. Control Assign Settings: 2 steps, 3 steps, 4 steps, 6 steps, 8 steps, 12 steps, 16 steps Slope Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave. Settings: Off (no slope), Up, Down, Up&Down User LFO Step Value Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Determines the level for each step. Type Settings: -64 – +63 Filter EG Template Scale This includes pre-programmed settings for creating an original LFO. Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 99 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Control Assign From the Control Assign display you can make controller assign settings for the Part. You can change sounds as desired by setting the desired controller to “Source” and the desired parameter to “Destination.” Not only physical controllers such as the Pitch Bend wheel but also Motion Sequencer or Envelope Follower can be set to “Source” as a virtual controller. Up to 16 Controller Sets can be assigned to each Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control] [Control Assign] Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Auto Select (Auto Select Switch) Osc / Tune Determines whether the Auto Select function for Display Filter (below) is active (On) or not (Off). When this parameter is set to “On,” the operated Controller is automatically set in “Display Filter”. Also you can obtain the same result by pressing the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button. Pitch EG Settings: Off, On Display Filter Determines the Controller to be displayed. When “Super Knob” is selected, all Assignable Knob settings to be affected by using the Super Knob are displayed. Settings: PitchBend, ModWheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob, AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All Display Name Determines the name of each Assignable Knob 1–8 which is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). This is available only when “AsgnKnob 1–8” is set in “Source.” Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 100 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Destination Determines the target parameter to be controlled. To add another Destination, touch “+” icon. For information on setting examples for “Destination,” see below. Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document. Common Part Settings General Destination Setting Examples Pitch The following settings are some useful examples how to set the Destination. To control the volume: Part Param Volume To change the pitch: Part Param Pitch To change the speed of the Rotary Speaker: Ins A/B InsA/B SpdCtrl *1 To apply a Wah pedal effect: Ins A/B InsA/B PdlCtrl *2 Concerning *1 and *2, the following settings are necessary in addition to the above settings. *1 “Ins A/B Type” = “Rotary Speaker” in the Effect display of Part Edit *2 “Ins A/B Type” = “VCM Pedal Wah” in the Effect display of Part Edit Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Source Determines the desired Controller for controlling the parameter set in “Destination.” Settings: PitchBend, Modwheel, AfterTouch, FootCtrl 1, FootCtrl 2, FootSwitch, Ribbon, Breath, AsgnKnob 1–8, AsgnSw 1, AsgnSw 2, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst Element SW (Element Switch) Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Element (On) or not (Off). This is available only when Element-related parameters are set in “Destination.” Settings: Off, On Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 101 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Curve Type Determines the Curve type of the parameter set in “Destination.” In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates the operation value of the controller set in “Destination” and the horizontal axis indicates the parameter value set in “Source.” Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold, User 1–32 (when User Bank is selected), Library 1–8 (when the Library file is read) Standard Smooth Saw Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Sigmoid Triangle Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Threshold Square Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Bell Trapezoid Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Dogleg Tilt Sine Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element FM Bounce Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type AM Resonance Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan M Sequence Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ Discrete Saw Hold All Element Osc Balance Polarity (Curve Polarity) Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.” Settings: Uni, Bi Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according Copy or Exchange Elements to the Curve shape. Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value. Ratio (Curve Ratio) Determines the Curve Ratio. Settings: -64 – +63 MODX Reference Manual 102 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Param 1/Param 2 (Curve Parameter) Adjusts the Curve shape. This is not available depending on the Curve Type. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings Destination to Name General Copies the Parameter name from “Destination” to “Display Name.” This is available only when “Source” is set to “AsgnKnob 1–8.” Pitch Edit Common Control Settings Zone Transmit Calls up the Control Assign display for Common/Audio Edit. Delete Deletes the selected “Destination.” Zone Settings Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Edit User Curve Calls up the User Curve Setting display. You can select “Linear” (Curve by Linear Interpolation of eight coefficients) or “Step.” EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Curve No. (Curve Number) Indicates the selected Curve Number. Settings: 1–32 Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Curve Name Names the selected Curve. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Curve Type Determines the Curve Type. Settings: Linear, Step Input Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Determines the Input level of the Curve. “Input 1” is fixed to “0.” “Input 8” is fixed to 127 when the Curve Type is “Linear.” Settings: 0–127 Output Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the Output level of the Curve. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 103 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Selecting Controllers from a display other than Control Assign While displays other than the Control Assign display are shown, you can select controllers using the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button on the panel. When the cursor is on the parameter that can be set as a Destination, the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button on the panel lights up. Press the [CONTROL ASSIGN] button while the button is lit, and the Destination Parameter display appears. Move the controller on the panel or touch a number shown on the display to select a Source. The Control Assign display then appears with the Source selected in the Destination Parameter display set as the Source. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Motion Sequencer Lane Envelope Follower NOTE An error message appears when you move the Super knob and there are no more Assignable Knobs available for assigning a Source. Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 104 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Receive SW (Receive Switch) From the Receive Switch display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “ON,” the corresponding Part responds to the appropriate MIDI data. NOTE If CC (Receive Control Change) here is set to “OFF,” parameters related to Control Change are not available. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element [Common] [Mod/Control] [Receive SW] Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Pgm Change (Receive Program Change) Determines whether Program Change messages are received or not. Settings: Off, On Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Bank Select (Receive Bank Select) Determines whether Bank Select MSB/LSB messages are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Pitch Bend (Receive Pitch Bend) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel are received or not. Settings: Off, On Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale After Touch (Receive After Touch) Determines whether After Touch messages are received or not. Settings: Off, On Element LFO Element EQ All Element CC (Receive Control Change) Determines whether Control Change messages are received or not. Settings: Off, On Osc Balance Vol/Exp (Receive Volume/Expression) Determines whether volume messages are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: Off, On Pan (Receive Pan) Determines whether Pan messages are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 105 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio MW (Receive Modulation Wheel) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Sustain (Receive Sustain) Pitch Determines whether Sustain messages are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Zone Settings Settings: Off, On Zone Transmit Effect FC1/FC2 (Receive Foot Controller) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On FS (Receive Foot Switch) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Switch are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Settings: Off, On Individual A. SW1/A. SW2 (Receive Assignable Switch) Advanced Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control MS Hold (Receive Motion Sequencer Hold) Part LFO Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Control Assign Settings: Off, On MS Trigger (Receive Motion Sequencer Trigger) Determines whether MIDI messages generated by pressing the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] button are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Settings: Off, On Filter EG RB (Receive Ribbon Controller) Scale Determines whether MIDI messages for Ribbon Controller are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On BC (Receive Breath Controller) Determines whether MIDI messages for Breath Controller are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Settings: Off, On Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element A.Knob 1–8 (Receive Assignable Knob) Osc Determines whether MIDI messages generated by using the Assignable Knobs 1–4 (5–8) are received or not. This is not available when the Receive Control Change is set to Off. Balance Settings: Off, On Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 106 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Element Edit (Element) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune) Part Settings General From the Oscillator/Tune display you can assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element. You can set the note range for the Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Element will sound). Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] Element Switch Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Bank (Waveform Bank) Number (Waveform Number) Category (Waveform Category) Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Name (Waveform Name) Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Element. “Bank” indicates which waveform location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Element. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Element Switch Determines whether the currently selected Element is on or off. Settings: Off, On XA Control Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element. The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic Structure” on page 6. Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW Off, A.SW1 On, A.SW2 On For each Element, you can set to: Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note. Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to “Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note). Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note. Cycle (for multiple Elements): Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the first note will sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on. Random (for multiple Elements): Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note. A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound. A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound. A.SW Off: When both the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound. MODX Reference Manual 107 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Elem Group (Element Group) Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to Normal. Settings: 1–8 Elem Connect (Element Connection Switch) Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. Set this to “Thru” to bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element. Settings: Thru, InsA, InsB New Waveform Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash drive as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load” (page 198). After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter (below) will be available. Coarse (Coarse Tune) Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones. Settings: -48 – +48 Fine (Fine Tune) Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element. Settings: -64 – 63 Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Determines how the pitch of the selected Element responds to velocity. Settings: -64 – 63 Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises. Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls. 0: No change in pitch. Fine/Key (Pitch Fine Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the pitch in Fine Tuning. Settings: -64 – 63 Positive values: The pitch of lower notes drops and that of higher notes rises. Negative values: The pitch of lower notes rises and that of higher notes drops. Random (Random Pitch Depth) Allows you to randomly vary the pitch of the Element for each note you play. The higher the value, the greater the pitch variation. Settings: 0–127 Vel Cross Fade (Velocity Cross Fade) Determines how gradually the volume of an Oscillator decreases in proportion to the distance of Velocity changes outside the Velocity Limit setting. Settings: 0–127 The higher the value, the more gradually the volume decreases. 0: No sound Tempo Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Determines whether or not “Key On Delay” (below) is synchronized to the tempo. Settings: Off, On Length (Key On Delay Time Length) Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Element. This is not available when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on. Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 108 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Length (Key On Delay Note Length) Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “Key On Delay Tempo Sync” is set to on. Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat) Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Velocity Limit Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” Settings: 1–127 Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Note Limit Ins Assign Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Settings: C -2 – G8 Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch of the Center Key (below) as standard. Settings: -200% – +0% – +200% +100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart. 0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key. Negative values: The settings are reversed. Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Receive SW Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch. Element Settings: C -2 – G8 Osc / Tune Edit Waveform Pitch EG Calls up the Waveform Edit display. From this display you can set parameters related to Key Banks consisting of the Waveform. Filter Type • Key Bank Filter EG A Key Bank is digital audio data, made by directly recording a signal, such as that of vocals or electric guitar, to this instrument. Throughout this manual, the words “Key Bank” and “Wave” are sometimes used interchangeably; however, you should be careful to distinguish between “Key Bank” (raw audio data) and “Waveform” (collected audio data used to make up a Part). Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale • Key Bank and Waveform Key Banks are assigned and stored to Waveforms on the MODX. Each of the Waveforms can contain multiple Key Banks. To assign these Key Banks to a different space or container, you can set the note limit and velocity limit for each Key Bank. With this setting, the different Key Bank is played back depending on the pressed note and its velocity. Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Waveform Velocity Balance 127 40 Key Bank 1 Key Bank 2 Waveform Key Bank 3 D#2 MODX Reference Manual Key Bank 4 A#2 Copy or Exchange Elements Key Bank 5 G#3 F4 Key Number (Note Number) 109 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit • Part and Waveform You can play the Waveform by assigning it to a Part then playing the keyboard with that Part. You can assign the Waveform to an Element of the Part in the Element Edit for the Normal Part (AWM2) Edit (page 107) and the Key Edit for the Drum Part Edit (page 140). Number of Key Banks Waveform Total Size Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Note Limit and Velocity Limit for each Key Bank Part LFO Control Assign Waveform Indicates the selected Waveform. Receive SW Element Category (Waveform Main Category) Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Osc / Tune Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Waveform. Filter Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Pitch EG Type Name (Waveform Name) Filter EG Determines the selected Waveform. Waveform names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Scale Amplitude Number of Keybank (Number of Key Bank) Level / Pan Indicates the number of Key Banks in the selected Waveform. Amp EG Waveform Total Size Indicates the total data size of the selected Waveform. Scale Element LFO Element EQ Keybank (Key Bank) All Element Indicates the selected Key Bank. Osc Size (Key Bank Size) Balance Indicates the data size of the selected Key Bank. Channel (Key Bank Channel) Indicates the Channel (Stereo or Mono) of the selected Key Bank. Copy or Exchange Elements Velocity Limit Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which the selected Key Bank will respond. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for the selected Key Bank. Settings: 1–127 MODX Reference Manual 110 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Volume Determines the output volume of the selected Key Bank. Common Settings: 0–255 Part Settings Pan General Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Key Bank. Pitch Settings: L63–C–R63 Zone Settings Tune Coarse (Coarse Tune) Zone Transmit Effect Determines the pitch of the selected Key Bank in semitones. Settings: -64 – +63 Routing Tune Fine (Fine Tune) Ins A Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of the selected Key Bank. Ins B Settings: -64 – +63 EQ Ins Assign Delete Keybank (Delete Key Bank) Arpeggio Deletes the selected Key Bank. Common Add Keybank (Add Key Bank) Individual Adds new Key Bank to the selected Waveform. Advanced Motion Seq Common Pitch EG Lane From the Pitch EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how the pitch of the sound changes over time for Oscillators. These can be used to control the change in pitch from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Pitch EG] Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: Time: 0–127 Level: -128 – +127 MODX Reference Manual 111 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG times. The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter. Settings: -64 – +63 Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. Negative values: High notes result in a slow PEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed. 0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Center Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Determines how the PEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or to the strength with which the key is pressed. When the Center Key note is played, the PEG behaves according to its actual settings. Settings: C-2–G8 Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Time/Vel (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Segment (PEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) EQ Determines the velocity sensitivity of the PEG’s Time parameters. Select the Segment, and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter. Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63 Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed. Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow PEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed. 0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity. Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time. Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time. Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time. All: Time/Vel affects all PEG Time parameters. PEG Depth Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG. Receive SW Settings: -64 – +63 Element Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Curve (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Osc / Tune Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Pitch EG Depth. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Pitch Change and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity. Filter Pitch EG Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63 Positive values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to expand and low Velocities cause it to contract. Negative values: High Velocities cause the pitch range to contract and low Velocities cause it to expand. 0: The pitch envelope does not change, regardless of the Velocity. Settings: Curve: 0–4 0 1 2 3 4 Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 112 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Filter Common Part Settings Type General From the Type display you can make comprehensive settings for the Filter unit. The available parameters differ depending on which Filter type is selected here. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] [Type] Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Filter Type Osc / Tune Determines the Filter Type for the current Element. Basically, there are four different filters: LPF (Low Pass Filter), HPF (High Pass Filter), BPF (Band Pass Filter) and BEF (Band Elimination Filter). For details on settings, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Pitch EG Settings: LPF24D, LPF24A, LPF18, LPF18s, LPF12+HPF12, LPF6+HPF12, HPF24D, HPF12, BPF12D, BPFw, BPF6, BEF12, Filter Type BEF6, DualLPF, DualHPF, DualBPF, DualBEF, LPF12+BPF6, Thru Filter EG LPF Scale Resonance Gain Amplitude Level / Pan Gain Amp EG Scale Element LFO Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Cutoff Frequency Frequency Cutoff Frequency Frequency LPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. Compared to the LPF24A type, this filter can produce a more pronounced Resonance effect. Gain Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Resonance Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Copy or Exchange Elements Frequency LPF24A: A digital dynamic Low-Pass Filter with characteristics similar to a 4-pole analog synthesizer filter. LPF18: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter. LPF18s: 3-pole -18 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter. This filter has a smoother cutoff slope than the LPF18 type. MODX Reference Manual 113 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit HPF Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Gain Resonance Common Part Settings General Pitch Frequency Cutoff Frequency Zone Settings Zone Transmit LPF12+HPF12: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial. When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set LPF6+HPF12: A combination of a -6 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filter connected in serial. When this Filter Type is selected, HPF Cutoff and HPF Key Follow Sensitivity can be set. Effect Routing Ins A HPF24D: A dynamic -24 dB/oct High-Pass Filter with a characteristic digital sound. This filter can produce a Ins B pronounced Resonance effect. EQ Gain Ins Assign Resonance Arpeggio Common Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Individual Advanced Motion Seq HPF12: -12 dB/oct dynamic High-Pass Filter. Common Lane BPF Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Gain Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Center Frequency Frequency BPF12D: The combination of a -12 dB/oct HPF and LPF with a characteristic digital sound. Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Resonance Type Gain Filter EG Scale Amplitude Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Level / Pan Amp EG BPFw: A -12 dB/oct BPF that combines HPF and LPF filters to allow wider bandwidth settings. Scale Element LFO Gain Element EQ All Element Width Osc Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Frequency Balance BPF6: The combination of a -6 dB/oct HPF and LPF. Resonance Copy or Exchange Elements Gain Frequency Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter MODX Reference Manual 114 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit BEF Frequencies that are “passed” by the filter Gain Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Center Frequency Frequency Zone Transmit Effect BEF12: -12 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter. BEF6: -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filter. Routing DualLPF: Two -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filters connected in parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff Ins A Ins B Frequencies. EQ Distance Gain Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Frequency Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display (and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set) Individual Advanced Motion Seq DualHPF: Two -12 dB/oct High-Pass Filters connected in parallel. DualBPF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filters connected in parallel. DualBEF: Two -6 dB/oct Band-Eliminate Filters connected in serial. Common Lane Mod / Control Distance Gain Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Frequency Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display (and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set) Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG LPF12+BPF6: A combination of a -12 dB/oct Low-Pass Filter and a -6 dB/oct Band-Pass Filter connected in parallel. You can edit the distance between the two Cutoff Frequencies. Filter Type Gain Filter EG Scale Amplitude Distance Frequency Lower Cutoff Frequency is set directly on the display (and Higher Cutoff Frequency is automatically set) Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Determines the cutoff frequency for the Filter. This is used as the basic frequency for the selected Filter Type. Settings: 0–255 Cutoff/Vel (Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Determines how the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play notes. Settings: -64 – +63 Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises. Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the Cutoff Frequency rises. 0: The Cutoff Frequency does not change, regardless of the Velocity. MODX Reference Manual Copy or Exchange Elements 115 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Resonance Width This parameter’s function varies according to the selected Filter Type. If the selected filter is an LPF, HPF, BPF (excluding BPFw), or BEF, this parameter is used to set the Resonance. For the BPFw, it is used to adjust the frequency bandwidth. This parameter is used to set the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the cutoff frequency. This can be used in combination with the “Cutoff” parameter to add further character to the sound. For the BPFw, this parameter is used to adjust the width of the band of signal frequencies passed by the filter. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Types. Settings: 0–127 Cutoff/Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Cutoff Frequency (above). The Center Key (next parameter) is used as the basic Cutoff Frequency for this parameter. Settings: - 200% – +200% Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes. Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Center Key (Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Individual This indicates that the central note for “Cutoff/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display purposes only; the value cannot be changed. Advanced Motion Seq Gain Sets the Gain (the amount of boost applied to the signal sent to the Filter Unit). In case of the Filter Type with “Distance” and “Res/Vel” parameters Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Distance Determines the distance between the Cutoff Frequencies for the Dual Filter types and the LPF12+BPF6 filter. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type. Osc Balance Settings: -128 – +127 Res/Vel (Resonance Velocity Sensitivity) Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the degree to which Resonance responds to Velocity, or the strength with which you play notes. This parameter is not displayed depending on the selected Filter Type. Settings: -64 – +63 Positive values: The higher the Velocity, the greater the Resonance. Negative values: The lower the Velocity, the greater the Resonance. 0: No change of the Resonance value. MODX Reference Manual 116 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio In case of the Filter Type with “HPF Cutoff” and “HPF Cutoff/Key” parameters Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency) Common Determines the central frequency for the Key Follow parameter (below) of the HPF. This parameter is available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or “LPF6+HPF12” is selected. Lane Mod / Control Settings: 0–255 Part LFO HPF Cutoff/Key (High Pass Filter Cutoff Key Follow Sensitivity) Control Assign Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or Octave Range) affect the Cutoff Frequency of the HPF. This parameter is available only when one of the filter types “LPF12+HPF12” or “LPF6+HPF12” is selected. Settings: -200% – +200% Positive values: The Cutoff Frequency drops for lower notes and rises for higher notes. Negative values: The Cutoff Frequency rises for lower notes and drops for higher notes. Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 117 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Filter EG Common From the Filter EG display you can make all time and level settings for the Filter EG, which determine how the sound changes over time for Elements. These can be used to control the change the sound from the moment a note is pressed on the keyboard to the moment the sound stops. Part Settings General Pitch Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] [Filter EG] Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Element Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Osc / Tune Time Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Pitch EG Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level Filter Settings: Time: 0–127 Level: -128 – +127 Type Filter EG Scale Time/Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Filter EG Times. The basic speed of change for the FEG is at the note specified in Center Key (below). Settings: -64 – +63 Positive values: High notes result in a high FEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. Negative values: High notes result in a slow FEG transition speed while low notes result in a high speed. 0: The FEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. Center Key (FEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. Settings: C-2–G8 Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 118 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Time/Vel (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Segment (FEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) Common Determines how the FEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter. Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63 Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed. Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow FEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed. 0: The pitch transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity. Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack time. Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 time. Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time. Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release time. All: Time/Vel affects all FEG Time parameters. Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ FEG Depth Ins Assign Determines the Cutoff Frequency range for Filter EG. Arpeggio Settings: -64 – +63 Common Depth/Vel (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Curve (FEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Individual Advanced Determines how the range of the Cutoff Frequency responds to Velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the Filter EG Depth. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates Cutoff Frequency Change and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity. Settings: Depth/Vel: -64 – +63 Settings: Curve: 0–4 0 Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 1 2 3 4 Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune NOTE For details on FEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 119 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Scale (Filter Scale) From the Filter Scale display you can set parameters related to Filter Scale for Elements. “Filter Scale” controls the Filter Cutoff Frequency according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Filter] [Scale] Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Break Point 1–4 Determines the four Break Points by specifying the respective note numbers. Settings: C -2 – G8 NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard. Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Cutoff Offset 1–4 Determines the offset value to the Cutoff Frequency at each Break Point. Settings: -128 – +127 NOTE Regardless of the size of these Offsets, the minimum and maximum Cutoff limits (values of 0 and 127, respectively) cannot be exceeded. NOTE Any note played below the Break Point 1 note results in the Break Point 1 Level setting. Likewise, any note played above the Break Point 4 note results in the Break Point 4 Level setting. NOTE For information on setting examples for Filter Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 120 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Utility Drum Part Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Amplitude Common Part Settings Level/Pan General Pitch From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each individual Element. Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] [Level/Pan] Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Level Osc / Tune Determines the output level of the Element. Pitch EG Settings: 0–127 Filter Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Offset (Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Curve (Level Velocity Sensitivity Curve) Type Filter EG Scale Determines how the actual Velocity will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The Offset parameter raises or lowers the level specified by the “Level/Vel.” If the result is higher than 127, the velocity is set to 127. The Curve parameter lets you select from five different preset velocity curves (graphically indicated in the display) that determine how velocity affects the actual Velocity. In the illustrations below, the vertical axis indicates the actual resulting Velocity and the horizontal axis indicates Velocity with which you play notes. Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 64 Y 127 127 Y A 127 B B 0 64 127 X 0 64 127 X 0 Scale Element EQ Osc Balance A B Copy or Exchange Elements C C C Amp EG All Element Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 96 Y A Level / Pan Element LFO Settings: Level/Vel: -64 – +63 Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. 0: The output level does not change. Settings: Offset: 0–127 Level Velocity Sensitivity Offset = 0 Amplitude 64 127 X A: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 0 B: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 32 C: Level Velocity Sensitivity = 64 X: Velocity with which you play a note Y: Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) MODX Reference Manual 121 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Settings: Curve: 0–4 0 1 2 3 4 Common Part Settings General Pan (Element Pan) Determines the stereo Pan position for the selected Element. Settings: L63–C (center)–R63 Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Alternate Pan Routing Determines the amount by which the sound is panned alternately left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position. Ins A Settings: L64–C–R63 Ins B EQ Random Pan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Element is panned randomly left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position. Settings: 0–127 Scaling Pan Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan position, left and right, of the selected Element. At note C3, the main Pan setting (above) is used for the basic Pan position. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 Positive values: Moves the pan position to the left for lower notes and to the right for higher notes. Negative values: Moves the pan position to the right for lower notes and to the left for higher notes. Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Level/Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the volume of the selected Element. A Center Key setting of C3 is used as the basic setting. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 Positive values: Lowers the output level for lower notes and raises it for higher notes. Negative values: Raises the output level for lower notes and lowers it for higher notes. Center Key (Level Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) This indicates that the central note for “Level/Key” above is C3. Keep in mind that this is for display purposes only; the value cannot be changed. Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 122 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Amp EG (Amplitude EG) Common From the Amplitude EG display you can make all the time and level settings for the Amplitude EG, which determine how the volume of the sound changes over time. Using the AEG, you can control the transition in volume from the moment the sound starts is to the moment the sound stops. Part Settings General Pitch Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] [Amp EG] Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Initial Time Level – Initial Level Element Osc / Tune Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level – Pitch EG Filter Type Settings: Time: 0–127 Level: 0–127 Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude EG Times. The Center Key parameter (below) is used as the basic amplitude for this parameter. Settings: -64 – +63 Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. Negative values: High notes result in a slow Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a fast speed. 0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. Center Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Determines the central note for the “Time/Key” parameter above. When the Center Key note is played, the AEG behaves according to its actual settings. Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Settings: C-2–G8 Release Adj (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key Release Adjustment) Determines the sensitivity of AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to AEG Release. The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Copy or Exchange Elements Settings: 0–127 127: Sets the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity to the value of Decay 1 or Decay 2. 0: Produces no effect in the AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity. MODX Reference Manual 123 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Time/Vel (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity) Segment (AEG Time Velocity Sensitivity Segment) Determines how the AEG transition time (speed) responds to Velocity, or the strength with which the key is pressed. Select the “Segment,” and then set its “Time/Vel” parameter. Settings: Time/Vel: -64 – +63 Positive values: High Velocities result in a fast AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a slow speed. Negative values: High Velocities result in a slow AEG transition speed while low Velocities result in a fast speed. 0: The amplitude transition speed does not change, regardless of the Velocity. Settings: Segment: Attack, Atk+Dcy (Attack+Decay), Decay, Atk+Rls (Attack+Release), All Attack: Time/Vel parameter affects Attack Time. Atk+Dcy: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Decay1 Time. Decay: Time/Vel parameter affects Decay Time. Atk+Rls: Time/Vel Value affects Attack/Release Time. All: Time/Vel affects all AEG Time parameters. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Half Damper (Half Damper Switch) When the Half Damper Switch is set to on, you can produce a “half-pedal” effect just as on a real acoustic piano by using the optional FC3 Foot Controller connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel. Settings: off, on Time (Half Damper Time) Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released while holding down the Foot Controller FC3 with the Half Damper Switch parameter turned on. This is not available when the Half Damper Switch is set to off. Settings: 0–127 NOTE For details on AEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 124 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Scale (Amplitude Scale) From the Amplitude Scale display you can make Amplitude Scale settings for each Element. Amplitude Scale function controls the Amplitude output level according to the positions of the notes on the keyboard. Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Pitch Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Amplitude] [Scale] Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Break Point 1–4 Determines the four Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers. Settings: C -2 – G8 NOTE Break Points 1 to 4 will be automatically be arranged in ascending order across the keyboard. Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Level Offset 1–4 Determines the offset value of the level of each Amplitude Scale Break Point. Settings: -128 – +127 NOTE For details on setting examples of the Amplitude Scaling, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 125 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Element LFO Common From the Element LFO display you can make LFO related setting for each Element. The Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) unit of the Element generates a low frequency signal. The signal from the LFO can be used to modulate the pitch, filter, and amplitude. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Element LFO] Part Settings General Pitch Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW LFO Wave Element Selects the LFO waveform that is used to vary the sound. Osc / Tune Settings: Saw, Triangle, Square Pitch EG Saw (Sawtooth wave) Triangle (Triangle wave) Square (Square wave) Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Speed (LFO Speed) Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. The larger the setting, the faster the speed. Level / Pan Settings: 0–63 Amp EG Scale Key On Reset (LFO Key On Reset) Element LFO Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is played. Element EQ Settings: Off, On Off On All Element Osc Balance Time Key on Time Key on Delay (LFO Delay Time) Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the delay time between the moment that a Note On message is received and the moment the LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–127 Fade In (LFO Fade In Time) Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the “Delay” time has elapsed). Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 126 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Pitch Mod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound. Settings: 0–127 Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings Filter Mod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) General Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency. Pitch Settings: 0–127 Zone Settings Amp Mod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) Zone Transmit Determines the amount (depth) by which the LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of the sound. Settings: 0–127 Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Element EQ From the Element EQ display you can make EQ related settings for each Element. Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Element EQ] Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG EQ Type (Element EQ Type) Determines the Equalizer Type. Settings: 2-band, P.EQ (Parametric EQ), Boost6 (boost 6dB), Boost12 (boost 12dB), Boost18 (boost 18dB), Thru 2-band: This is a “shelving” equalizer, which combines separate high and low frequency bands. P.EQ: The Parametric EQ is used to attenuate or boost signal levels (gain) around the Frequency. Boost6, Boost12, Boost18: These can be used to boost the level of the entire signal by 6dB, 12dB and 18dB, respectively Thru: This setting bypasses the equalizers leaving the entire signal unaffected. Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 127 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) When “EQ Type” is set to “2-band” Common Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz Part Settings High Freq Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz + General Pitch Frequency 0 – Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Low Freq Gain Live Set Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Low Gain High Gain Settings: -12dB – +12dB Settings: -12dB – +12dB Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG EQ Low Gain (Element EQ Low Gain) Determines the level gain of the Low band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB EQ Hi Gain (Element EQ High Gain) Determines the level gain of the High band. Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Settings: -12dB – +12dB Level / Pan EQ Low Freq (Element EQ Low Frequency) Amp EG Determines the frequency for the Low band. Scale Settings: 50.1Hz–2.00kHz EQ Hi Freq (Element EQ High Frequency) Determines the frequency for the High band. Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 128 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) When “EQ Type” is set to “P.EQ” Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Gain Q + Part Settings Settings: 0.7–10.3 Frequency 0 General Pitch Zone Settings Gain – Settings: -12dB – +12dB Freq Settings: 139.7H–12.9kHz Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune EQ Gain (Element EQ Gain) Pitch EG Determines the level gain of the frequency set in “EQ Freq.” Filter Settings: -12dB – +12dB EQ Freq (Element EQ Frequency) Determines the frequency to be attenuated/boosted. Settings: 139.7Hz–12.9kHz Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan EQ Q (Element EQ Q) This varies the signal level at the Frequency setting to create various frequency curve characteristics. Settings: 0.7–10.3 NOTE For details on EQ structure, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 129 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Element All (All Element) Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings Osc (Oscillator) From the Oscillator display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for the eight Elements. General Pitch Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection [All] [Osc] Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element SW (Element Switch) Determines whether each Element is active or not. Settings: Off, On Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter XA Control Determines the functioning of the Expanded Articulation (XA) feature of an Element. The XA feature is sophisticated tone generator system that allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural performance techniques. It also provides other unique modes for random and alternate sound changes as you play. For details on the XA feature, see the “Tone Generator Block” in the “Basic Structure” on page 6. Settings: Normal, Legato, Key Off, Cycle, Random, A.SW1 On (Assignable Switch 1 ON), A.SW2 On (Assignable Switch 2 Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan ON), A.SW Off (Assignable Switch 1 OFF) Amp EG Normal: The Element sounds normally each time you play the note. Legato: When the Mono/Poly parameter is set to Mono, this Element will be played in place of the one which is set to Scale “Normal” of the XA Control parameter when you play the keyboard in legato fashion (playing the next note of a single-note line or melody before releasing the previous note). Key Off: The Element will sound each time you release the note. Cycle: Each Element sounds alternately according to its numerical order. In other words, playing the first note will sound Element 1, the second note Element 2, and so on. Random: Each Element will sound randomly each time you play the note. A.SW1 On: When the [ASSIGN 1] button is turned On, the Element will sound. A.SW2 On: When the [ASSIGN 2] button is turned On, the Element will sound. A.SW Off: When both of the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are turned Off, the Element will sound. Group (Element Group) Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements Determines the group for XA Control. All Elements that have the same type of XA features must have the same group number. This setting does not apply when the XA Control parameters of all Elements are set to Normal. Settings: 1–8 Waveform (Waveform Name) Indicates the Waveform Name for each Element. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 130 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Velocity Limit Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Element will respond. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. If you first specify the maximum value and then the minimum value, for example “93 to 34,” then the Velocity range covers both “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (AWM2) Edit Common Part Settings General Settings: 1–127 Pitch Note Limit Zone Settings Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Element. Each Element will only sound for notes played within its specified range. If you first specify the highest note and then the lowest note, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covers both “C-2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” Zone Transmit Settings: C -2 – G8 Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Balance EQ From the Balance display you can set parameters related to Level, Pitch, and Pan for the eight Elements. Ins Assign Arpeggio Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection [All] [Balance] Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude SW (Element Switch) Level / Pan Determines whether each Element is active or not. Amp EG Settings: Off, On Scale Coarse (Coarse Tune) Determines the pitch of each Element in semitones. Settings: -48 – +48 Element LFO Element EQ All Element Fine (Fine Tune) Osc Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Element. Balance Settings: -64 – +63 Cutoff (Cutoff Frequency) Determines the Cutoff Frequency for each Element. Settings: 0–255 Copy or Exchange Elements Pan (Element Pan) Determines the stereo pan position for each Element. Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right) Level Determines the level of each Element. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 131 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Copying or Exchanging Elements Normal Part (AWM2) Edit You can copy or exchange between Elements. Operation Common Part Settings [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Select Element to be copied [SHIFT] + [EDIT] Copy General Pitch Exchange Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ 1 3 Ins Assign Arpeggio Common 2 4 Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO NOTE Copying or exchanging between different Part types (for example, between Elements and Operators) cannot be executed. Copy Touching this button activates the Copy function between Elements. Control Assign Receive SW Element Osc / Tune Pitch EG Exchange Touching this button activates the Exchange function between Elements 1 Part to be copied (or exchanged) NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed. 2 Element to be copied (or exchanged) 3 Copy (or exchange) destination Part 4 Copy (or exchange) destination Element Filter Type Filter EG Scale Amplitude Level / Pan Amp EG Scale Element LFO Element EQ All Element Osc Balance Copy or Exchange Elements MODX Reference Manual 132 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Drum Part Edit Common Each Drum Part can consist of up to 73 Drum Keys, assigned to notes spread across the keyboard (C0 to C6). There are two types of Drum Part Edit displays: Key Common Edit display, for editing the settings that apply to all Drum keys; and Key Edit display, for editing individual keys. This section explains the parameters for Key Common Edit and Key Edit. Part Settings General Zone Settings Zone Transmit Key Common Edit (Common) Effect Routing Ins A Part Settings Ins B EQ General Operation Ins Assign [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Drum Key [Common] [Part Settings] [General] Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Element EQ Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Part Category Main (Part Main Category) Part Category Sub (Part Sub Category) Determines the Main category and the Sub category for the selected Part. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Part Name Determines the Part name of the selected Part. Part names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Volume (Part Volume) Determines the output level of the selected Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Part. Settings: L63–C–R63 Dry Level Determines the dry sound level (not effect applied) of the selected Part. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.” Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 133 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Var Send (Variation Send) Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.” Settings: 0–127 Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings General Rev Send (Reverb Send) Zone Settings Determines the level of the selected Part that is sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” or “Drum.” Zone Transmit Settings: 0–127 Effect Routing Part Output (Part Output Select) Ins A Determines which audio output is used for the selected Part. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off, Drum MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key. Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Note Shift Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones. Settings: -24 – +0 – +24 Advanced Motion Seq Common Detune Determines the pitch settings of the selected Part in 0.1 Hz increments. Lane Mod / Control Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz Control Assign Pitch Bend / (Pitch Bend Range Upper/Lower) Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones. Receive SW Key Settings: -48 – +0 – +24 Osc / Tune Arp Play Only (Arpeggio Play Only) Filter Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Level / Pan Element EQ Settings: Off, On Element Pan (Element Pan Switch) Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Key Part (made via [EDIT] Part selection Drum Key selection [Level/Pan] “Pan”) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position for the each Key is set to center in the Part. Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Settings: Off, On Velocity Limit Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Settings: 1–127 Note Limit Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Settings: C -2 – G8 MODX Reference Manual 134 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Velocity Depth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing strength. The higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as shown below). Common Part Settings General Settings: 0–127 When Offset (below) is set to 64: Depth=127 Zone Settings Depth=64 Zone Transmit 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) Effect Routing Depth=32 Ins A Ins B Depth=0 EQ 0 127 Velocity with which you play a note Ins Assign Arpeggio Velocity Offset (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Common Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This lets you raise or lower all velocities based on this setting value—allowing you to automatically compensate for playing too strongly or too softly. Settings: 0–127 Advanced Motion Seq When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 32 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 0 Individual When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 64 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset = 96 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Element EQ Zone Settings Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 71). Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Zone Transmit Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73). MODX Reference Manual 135 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Effect Common Part Settings Routing General Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Drum Key [Common] [Effect] [Routing] Zone Transmit Effect Drum Key Connection Switch Insertion FX Switch Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Insertion FX Switch Filter Level / Pan Drum Key Connection Switch Element EQ Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key, and which is bypassed (Thru). When the “Keyboard Select” is on, you can select Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard. Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B) Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Insertion FX Switch Determines whether or not Insertion Effect A / Insertion Effect B is active or not. Settings: Off, On Category (Effect Category) Type (Effect Type) Determines the category and type for the selected effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Preset Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. Settings: For a list of all Preset Performances, see the Data List PDF document. Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Determine the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available depending on the selected Effect Type. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 76) of the Normal Part (AWM2). Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off MODX Reference Manual 136 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings RevSend (Reverb Send) VarSend (Variation Send) General Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb/Variation effect. This is active only when the Part Output/Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.” Zone Transmit Settings: 0–127 Zone Settings Effect Routing Part Output (Part Output Select) Ins A Determines the specific output for the audio signal. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off, Drum MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Drum: “Drum Key Out” is displayed to determine the specific output for each Drum Key. Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Envelope Follower Calls up the Envelope Follower Setting display. Refer to the Routing display (page 76) for Normal Parts (AWM2). Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Element EQ Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys InsRev (Insertion Reverb Send) InsVar (Insertion Variation Send) Determines the Send level for the entire Drum Part (all keys), sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/ Variation effect. This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB” and the Part Output/ Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.” Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 137 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings General Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send) KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send) Determines the Send level for each Drum Key, sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb/Variation effect. This is active only when the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “Thru” and the Part Output/Drum Key Output is set to “MainL&R.” Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Settings: 0–127 Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Element EQ Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select) Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key. This is displayed only when the Part Output is set to “Drum.” Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8 MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. NOTE When the Drum Key Connection Switch is set to “InsA” or “InsB,” this parameter is fixed to “MainL&R.” MODX Reference Manual 138 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Ins A (Insertion Effect A) Ins B (Insertion Effect B) Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77). General Zone Settings EQ (Part Equalizer) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78). Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins Assign (Insertion Assign) Ins A Ins B Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81). EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Arpeggio Common Individual Common Advanced Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 82). Motion Seq Common Individual Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85). Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Advanced Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 87), except for the additional parameter below. Fixed SD/BD When this parameter is set to On, C1 will be used as the note of the Bass Drum and D1 will be used as the note of the Snare Drum in Arpeggio playback. Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Element EQ Settings: Off, On Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Common Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 88). Lane Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91). Mod/Control (Modulation/Control) Control Assign Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the different setting values in the Destination parameter. For the setting value for “Destination,” see the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document. Receive SW (Receive Switch) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105). MODX Reference Manual 139 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Key Edit (Key) Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings Osc/Tune (Oscillator/Tune) General Zone Settings From the Oscillator/Tune display you can set Oscillator-related parameters for each Key of the Drum Part. Zone Transmit Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Key selection [Osc/Tune] Effect Routing Drum Key Switch Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Bank (Waveform Bank) Number (Waveform Number) Category (Waveform Category) Sub Category (Waveform Sub Category) Name (Waveform Name) Indicates the information of the waveform used for the selected Drum Key. “Bank” indicates which waveform location (Preset, User and Library) is assigned to the Key. Element EQ Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Settings: Refer to the Data List PDF document. Drum Key Switch Determines whether the currently selected Drum Key is used or not. Settings: Off, On Assign Mode (Key Assign Mode) Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously, and without corresponding note off messages. Settings: Single, Multi Single: Double or repeated playback of the same note is not possible. The first note will be stopped, then the next note will be sounded. Multi: All notes are sounded simultaneously. This allows playback of the same note when it is played multiple times in succession (especially for tambourine and cymbal sounds that you would want to ring out to their full decay). Connect (Drum Key Connection Switch) Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Drum Key. The Insertion Effect is bypassed if “Thru” is selected. This parameter is same as the “Connect” parameter in the “Routing” display of Effect settings in Key Common Edit. Making a setting here automatically changes the setting of that parameter as well. Settings: Thru, InsA (Insertion Effect A), InsB (Insertion Effect B) MODX Reference Manual 140 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) New Waveform Loads Audio data stored in the USB flash drive as “Waveform.” For details on loading, see “Load” (page 198). After the Waveform is loaded, the Edit Waveform parameter will be available. For details on “Edit Waveform,” see page 109. Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings General Zone Settings Coarse (Coarse Tune) Zone Transmit Determines the pitch of each Drum Key Wave in semitones. Settings: -48 – +48 Effect Routing Fine (Fine Tune) Ins A Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Drum Key Wave. Ins B Settings: -64 – 63 EQ Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Determines how the pitch of the selected Drum key responds to velocity. Settings: -64 – 63 Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises. Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls. 0: No change in pitch. Rcv Note Off (Receive Note Off) Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Select whether MIDI Note Off messages are received by each Drum Key. Common Settings: off, on Lane Group (Alternate Group) Set the Alternate Group to which the key is assigned. The Parts to which the same number is assigned here cannot sound simultaneously. This setting helps to reproduce the sounds of a real drum kit, in which some drum sounds cannot physically be played simultaneously, such as open and closed hi-hats. Settings: off, 1–127 Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune KeyRev (Drum Key Reverb Send) KeyVar (Drum Key Variation Send) Filter Determines the level of the Drum key sound (the bypassed signal) that is sent to Reverb/Variation effect. This is not available depending on the setting of the Drum Key Connection Switch. Element EQ Level / Pan Settings: 0–127 Drum Key Out (Drum Key Output Select) Determines the specific output for the individual Drum Key. This is not available depending on the settings of Drum Key Connection Switch or Part Output. Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8 MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Keyboard Select (Keyboard Select Switch) Determines whether or not the Keyboard Select setting is active or not. When this is set to on, you can select Drum Keys by playing the notes on the keyboard. Settings: Off, On Drum Key Indicates the selected Drum key. Settings: C0–C6 MODX Reference Manual 141 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Filter Common From the Filter display you can apply filter settings to the Drum Part. These let you apply a low pass filter and high pass filter to each individual Drum key. Operation Part Settings General Zone Settings [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Key selection [Filter] Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Cutoff (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency) Osc / Tune Use this parameter to set the cutoff frequency for the low-pass filter. Filter Settings: 0–255 Level / Pan Cutoff/Vel (Low Pass Filter Cutoff Velocity Sensitivity) Element EQ Set the velocity sensitivity of the Low Pass Filter Cutoff frequency. Positive settings will cause the Cutoff Frequency to rise the harder you play the keyboard. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. Settings: -64 – +63 Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Resonance (Low Pass Filter Resonance) Determines the amount of Resonance (harmonic emphasis) applied to the signal at the Cutoff Frequency. Settings: 0–127 HPF Cutoff (High Pass Filter Cutoff Frequency) Determines the Cutoff frequency of the High Pass Filter. Settings: 0–255 MODX Reference Manual 142 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Drum Part Edit Level/Pan Common Part Settings From the Level/Pan display you can make Level and Pan settings for each Drum Key. General [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Key selection [Level/Pan] Operation Zone Settings Zone Transmit Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Key Osc / Tune Time Attack Decay1 Decay2 Filter Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Level / Pan Level – Element EQ – Decay1 Level Settings: Time: 0–127, Hold (only for Decay2) Level: 0–127 Decay2 Time = 0–126 Level Attack level Level Attack level Decay1 level Attack time Key on Decay1 time Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Decay2 Time = Hold Decay2 time Decay1 level Time Attack time Key on Decay1 time Decay2 time Time Level Determines the output level of the Drum Key. This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the various sounds of the Drum Key. Settings: 0–127 Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Determines how the output level of the Drum Key responds to Velocity. Settings: -64 – +63 Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. 0: The output level does not change. Pan Sets the pan position (stereo position) of each Drum Key. This will also be used as the basic Pan position for the Alternate and Random settings. Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right) MODX Reference Manual 143 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Alternate Pan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum key is panned alternately left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the basic Pan position. Settings: L64–C–R63 Drum Part Edit Common Part Settings General Random Pan Zone Settings Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Drum Key is panned randomly left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting (above) is used as the Center Pan position. Zone Transmit Settings: 0–127 Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Element EQ EQ Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 127). Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Same as “Copying or Exchanging Elements” for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 132). Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Control Assign Receive SW Key Osc / Tune Filter Level / Pan Element EQ Copying or Exchanging Drum Keys MODX Reference Manual 144 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common A Normal Part (FM-X) can consist of up to eight Operators. There are two types of Normal Part (FM-X) Edit displays: Operator Common Edit display, for editing settings common to all eight Operators; and Operator Edit display, for editing individual Operators. Part Settings General Algorithm Operator Common Edit (Common) Part Settings Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale General Filter Type From the General display you can set various parameters such as Part Name, Volume, and Pan. Filter EG Filter Scale Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Part Settings] [General] Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Most parameters are the same as parameters on the Element Common Edit display for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 66) except the following additional parameters as bellows. Form / Freq Level Random Pan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned randomly left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the Center Pan position. Settings: 0–127 Copy or Exchange Operators Alternate Pan Determines the amount by which the sound of the selected Operator is panned alternately left and right for each note you press. The Pan setting is used as the basic Pan position. Settings: L64–C–R63 Scaling Pan Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pan position, left and right, of the selected Operator. At note C3, the main Pan setting is used for the basic Pan position. Positive settings will cause the Pan position to be set left when you play in the lower range on the keyboard and to be set right when you play in the higher range on the keyboard. A negative setting will have the opposite effect. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 MODX Reference Manual 145 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio KeyOnDly Sync (Key On Delay Tempo Sync Switch) Determines whether or not “Key On Delay Time Length” is synchronized to the tempo. Settings: Off, On Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common Part Settings Delay Length (Key On Delay Time Length) General Determines the time (or elapsed delay) between the moment you press a note on the keyboard and the point at which the sound is actually played. You can set different delay times for each Operator. This is not available when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on. Algorithm Settings: 0–127 Zone Transmit Zone Settings Pitch / Filter Delay Length (Key On Delay Note Length) Determines the timing of “Key On Delay” when “KeyOnDly Sync” is set to on. Settings: 1/16, 1/8 Tri. (eighth-note triplets), 1/16 Dot. (dotted sixteenth notes), 1/8, 1/4 Tri. (quarter-note triplets), 1/8 Dot. (dotted eighth notes), 1/4, 1/2 Tri. (half-note triplets), 1/4 Dot. (dotted quarter notes), 1/2, Whole Tri. (whole-note triplets), 1/2 Dot. (dotted half notes), 1/4 x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 1/4 x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat) Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Algorithm Ins B From the Algorithm display you can specify the Algorithm, which determines the arrangement of the Operators and how the FM sound is generated. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Part Settings] [Algorithm] EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level Copy or Exchange Operators Algorithm (Algorithm Number) Changes Algorithms. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Feedback (Feedback Level) Waveforms can be changed by feeding some of the signal generated by an operator back through that operator. This allows you to set the feedback level. Settings: 0–7 MODX Reference Manual 146 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Algorithm Search Calls up the Algorithm Search display. From this display you can search for desired Algorithms by filtering the number of Carriers, or the maximum length of the serial connection of Operators. Algorithm list Common Part Settings General Algorithm Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Chain Filters the Algorithms by the maximum length of serial connection of Operators. Settings: 1–8 Individual Advanced Motion Seq Carrier Filters the Algorithms by the number of Carriers. Settings: 1–8 Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Zone Settings 2nd LFO Control Assign Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 71). Receive SW Operator Zone Transmit Form / Freq Level Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 73). Copy or Exchange Operators MODX Reference Manual 147 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Pitch/Filter Common Part Settings Pitch General Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 68), except that the Legato Slope parameter is not available. Algorithm Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter PEG/Scale (Pitch EG/Scale) Pitch From the Pitch EG/Scale display you can make all time and level settings for the Pitch EG, which determine how the pitch of the sound changes over time, and the Scale for Parts. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Pitch/Filter] [PEG/Scale] PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Receive SW Operator Initial Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Form / Freq Level Time – Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Level Hold Level Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release Level Settings: Time: 0–99 Level: -50 – +50 Copy or Exchange Operators PEG Depth Determines the pitch range for Pitch EG. Settings: 8 oct, 2 oct, 1 oct, 0.5 oct Depth/Vel (PEG Depth Velocity Sensitivity) Determines how the pitch range will be generated according to the Velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. Settings: 0–7 Time/Key (PEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Pitch EG Times. The Center Key (C3) is used as the basic pitch for this parameter. Settings: 0–7 Positive values: High notes result in a high PEG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. 0: The PEG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. MODX Reference Manual 148 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the pitch interval of adjacent notes), assuming the pitch of the Center Key (below) as standard. Settings: -200% – +0% – +200% +100% (the normal setting): Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart. 0%: All notes have the same pitch as the Center Key. Negative values: The settings are reversed. Center Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity Center Key) Determines the central note or pitch for the Key Follow effect on pitch. Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common Part Settings General Algorithm Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Settings: C -2 – G8 Pitch Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) PEG/Scale Determines how the pitch responds to velocity. Filter Type Settings: -64 – 63 Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises. Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls. 0: No change in pitch. Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Random Pitch (Random Pitch Depth) Allows you to randomly vary the pitch for each note played. Settings: 0–127 NOTE For details on PEG, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Filter Type Common Individual Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 113). Advanced Motion Seq Filter EG Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 118). Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Filter Scale Same as the Element Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 120). 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level Copy or Exchange Operators MODX Reference Manual 149 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Effect Common Part Settings Routing General From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for Parts. Algorithm Zone Settings Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Effect] [Routing] Insertion FX Switch Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Insertion FX Switch Lane Mod / Control Insertion FX Switch Part LFO Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not. 2nd LFO Settings: Off, On Category (Effect Category) Type (Effect Type) Determines the category and type for the selected Effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level Preset Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document. Copy or Exchange Operators Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not active depending on Effect Types. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display (page 76) of the Normal Part (AWM2). Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.” Settings: Parallel, Ins AB, Ins BA MODX Reference Manual 150 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Rev Send (Reverb Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Reverb effect. Settings: 0–127 Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common Part Settings Var Send (Variation Send) General Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B to the Variation effect. Algorithm Settings: 0–127 Zone Settings Part Output (Part Output Select) Zone Transmit Determines the specific audio output. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2...USB7&8, USB1...USB8, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Ins A (Insertion Effect A) Ins B (Insertion Effect B) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77). Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ EQ (Part Equalizer) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78). Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Ins Assign (Insertion Assign) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 81). Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Arpeggio Part LFO 2nd LFO Common Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 82). Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Individual Level Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 85). Advanced Copy or Exchange Operators Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 87). Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Common Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 88). Lane Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91). MODX Reference Manual 151 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Mod/Control (Modulation/Control) Common Part Settings Part LFO General Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 96), except that the setting values of the Destination parameter differ and that “Element Phase Offset (LFO Element Phase Offset)” is not available. For details on the setting values, see the Data List PDF document. Algorithm Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch 2nd LFO PEG/Scale Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Mod/Control] [2nd LFO] Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio) Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio) LFO Wave (2nd LFO Waveform) Selects the 2nd LFO waveform. Settings: Triangle, Saw Down, Saw Up, Square, Sine, S/H NOTE When “Sine” is selected, two waves will be shown in the diagram on the display because of the phase shift of the Amplitude Modulation wave. Key On Reset (2nd LFO Key On Reset) Operator Form / Freq Level Copy or Exchange Operators Determines whether or not the 2nd LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. Settings: Off, On Speed (2nd LFO Speed) Adjusts the speed (frequency) of the 2nd LFO variation. Settings: 0–99 Phase (2nd LFO Phase) Determines the starting phase point for the 2nd LFO Wave when it is reset. Settings: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270° Delay (2nd LFO Delay Time) Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the 2nd LFO comes into effect. Settings: 0–99 MODX Reference Manual 152 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Pitch Modulation (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the pitch of the sound. Settings: 0–99 Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common Part Settings Amplitude Modulation (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) General Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the amplitude or volume of the sound. Algorithm Settings: 0–99 Zone Settings Zone Transmit Filter Modulation (2nd LFO Filter Modulation Depth) Determines the amount (depth) by which the 2nd LFO waveform varies (modulates) the Filter Cutoff frequency. Settings: 0–99 Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio (2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Operator Depth Ratio) Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Pitch Modulation Depth” for each Operator. Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Settings: 0–7 Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio (2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Operator Depth Ratio) Adjusts the amount (depth) which is determined in the “2nd LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth” for each Operator. Settings: 0–7 Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Control Assign Individual Advanced Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator [Common] [Mod/Control] [Control Assign] Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level Copy or Exchange Operators Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the different setting values in the Destination parameter. For details on the setting value, see the Data List PDF document. Also the following parameter is shown on this display. Operator SW (Operator Switch) Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Operator (On) or not (Off). This is available only when an Operator-related parameter is set in “Destination.” Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 153 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common Part Settings General Algorithm Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Operator Rate EQ Determines the sensitivity of the Controller in changing the parameter set in “Destination” for each Operator. This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.” Ins Assign Settings: Off, On Arpeggio Common Individual SW/Rate (Operator Switch/Operator Rate Switch) Switches displays between “Operator Switch” and “Operator Rate.” This is available only when “Destination” is set to “OP Freq” or “OP AEG Offset.” Settings: Off, On Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Receive SW (Receive Switch) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 105). Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level Copy or Exchange Operators MODX Reference Manual 154 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Operator Edit (Operator) Common Form/Freq (Form/Frequency) Part Settings From the Form/Frequency display you can make all the waveform and frequency settings for Operators. General Algorithm Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Form/Freq] Zone Settings Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Effect Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Individual Advanced Motion Seq The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Initial Time Level Attack – Initial Level Attack Time Lane Decay Decay Time Attack Level Common – Settings: Time: 0–99 Level: -50 – +50 Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Spectral (Spectral Form) Determines the “spectral form” of the selected Operator. Settings: Sine, All 1, All 2, Odd 1, Odd 2, Res 1, Res 2 Operator Form / Freq Level Skirt (Spectral Skirt) Determines the spread of the “skirt” at the bottom of the formant harmonics curve. Higher values produce a wider skirt and smaller values produce a narrower skirt. This is not available when “Spectral” is set to “Sine.” Settings: 0–7 Copy or Exchange Operators Resonance (Spectral Resonance) Determines the degree to which velocity affects the Resonance of the Spectral Form. The center frequency moves to higher frequencies, letting you create a special resonance in the sound. This is active only when “Spectral” is set to “Res 1” or “Res 2.” Settings: 0–99 MODX Reference Manual 155 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Basic waveforms used as Operators contain harmonics, with the exception of “Sine.” A sine wave contains its fundamental frequency with no additional harmonics. Therefore, when “Form” is set to any waveform other than “Sine,” you can adjust harmonics and the peak of each formant, depending on the Waveform Type by determining the related parameters. Below are the basic waveforms and the characteristic parameters. Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Common Part Settings General Algorithm Level Skirt Level Zone Settings Skirt Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Level Skirt Frequency (Hz) Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Frequency (Hz) Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Level Skirt Effect Routing Ins A Ins B Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Frequency (Hz) Center Frequency (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Frequency (Hz) The larger the “Skirt” value, the more harmonics the wave contains. EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Common Skirt Skirt Resonance of Center Frequency Level Resonance of Center Frequency Level Individual Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO Frequency Center Frequency (Hz) (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) Frequency Center Frequency (Hz) (F.Coarse & Freq Fine) The larger “Resonance” value, the higher frequency the center frequency is moved. • Resonance=0: The Center frequency is the basic wave • Resonance=99: The Center frequency is the 100th harmonic 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Key On Reset (Oscillator Key On Reset) Level Determines whether or not the oscillation of the Operator is reset each time a note is pressed. Settings: Off, On Pitch/Vel (Pitch Velocity Sensitivity) Copy or Exchange Operators Determines how the pitch of the selected Operator responds to velocity. This is available only when “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed.” Settings: -7 – +7 Positive values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch rises. Negative values: The harder you play the keyboard, the more the pitch falls. 0: No change in pitch. Freq Mode (Oscillator Frequency Mode) Determines the settings for the Output Pitch of the Operator. Settings: Ratio, Fixed Ratio: Determines the Output Pitch by detecting the note you play on the keyboard. Fixed: Specifies the Pitch by setting “Coarse” and “Fine.” MODX Reference Manual 156 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Coarse (Coarse Tune) Determines the pitch of each Operator. Common Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0–31 Part Settings When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0–21 General Fine (Fine Tune) Algorithm Determines the fine tuning for the pitch of each Operator. Zone Settings Settings: When “Freq Mode” is set to “Ratio”: 0–99 Zone Transmit When “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed”: 0–127 Pitch / Filter Detune Sets the Output Pitch of the Operator slightly higher or lower. Even if the same parameter value is set for both “Coarse Tune” and “Fine Tune,” the Detune lets you slightly raise or lower the pitch of each Operator, allowing you to add an extra dimension to the sound and enhance the spatial characteristics. Settings: -15 – +15 Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Filter EG Filter Scale Pitch/Key (Pitch Key Follow Sensitivity) Effect Determines the sensitivity of the Key Follow effect (the degree depending on their position or octave range). This is available only when “Freq Mode” is set to “Fixed.” Routing Settings: 0–99 0: All notes are the same pitch specified by Coarse and Fine. 99: Adjacent notes are pitched one semitone apart. Ins B Ins A EQ Ins Assign Arpeggio Level Common From the Level display you can make all the volume settings for the Operator. Operation Individual [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Operator selection [Level] Advanced Motion Seq Common Lane Mod / Control Part LFO 2nd LFO Control Assign Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level Copy or Exchange Operators The full names of the available parameters are shown in the chart below, as they appear in the display. Time Hold Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release Hold Time Attack Time Decay1 Time Decay2 Time Release Time Attack Level Decay1 Level Decay2 Level Release (Hold) Level – Level Settings: Time: 0–99 Level: 0–99 Level (Operator Level) Determines the output level of the Operator. Settings: 0–99 MODX Reference Manual 157 Reference Performance Edit Search Normal Part (AWM2) Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Normal Part (FM-X) Edit Level/Vel (Level Velocity Sensitivity) Determines how the output level of the Operator responds to Velocity. Common Settings: -7 – +7 Positive values: The more strongly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. Negative values: The more softly you play the keyboard, the more the output rises. 0: The output level does not change. Part Settings General Algorithm Zone Settings Time/Key (AEG Time Key Follow Sensitivity) Determines the degree to which the notes (specifically, their position or octave range) affect the Amplitude EG Times. Settings: 0–7 Positive values: High notes result in a fast Amplitude EG transition speed while low notes result in a slow speed. 0: The Amplitude EG transition speed does not change, regardless of the played note. Zone Transmit Pitch / Filter Pitch PEG/Scale Filter Type Break Point Filter EG Determines the Amplitude Scale Break Points by specifying their respective note numbers. Settings: A-1 – C8 Filter Scale Effect Curve Lo (Low Curve) Curve Hi (High Curve) Routing Determines the curve for Amplitude scaling. Ins B Ins A Settings: -Linear, -Exp, +Exp, +Linear EQ Ins Assign Lvl/Key Lo (Low Depth) Lvl/Key Hi (High Depth) Arpeggio Determines the curve degree of the curve (above). Common Settings: 0–99 Individual The keyboard is divided in two at the break point. The high-pitch side at the right is set by using the R Depth and the R Curve; the low-pitch side at the left is set by using the L Depth and the L Curve as described below. Output Level +exp Motion Seq Common Lane + +linear Advanced +linear Mod / Control +exp Part LFO 2nd LFO Low Curve Control Assign High Curve Low Depth High Depth Key Receive SW Operator Form / Freq Level -exp -linear -linear -exp Break Point Output Level Copy or Exchange Operators The Output level of the Key set as the Break Point depends on the Operator Level setting. For the Keys in the left side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted based on the curve which is determined by the Low Curve and Low Depth. For the Keys in the right side of the Break Point, the Output level is adjusted based on the curve which is determined by the High Curve and High Depth. The Output level changes in an exponential fashion from the Break Point on the Exp type curve and the Output level changes in a linear fashion from the Break Point in the Linear type curve. In either case, the farther away from the Break Point the key is, the greater the Output level changes for the key. Copying or Exchanging Operators Same as “Copying or Exchanging Elements” for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 132). MODX Reference Manual 158 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit (Common/Audio) Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio A Performance consists up to 16 Parts. You can set the parameters related to the entire Performance and the Audio Parts in the Common/Audio Edit display. General Audio In Mixing General Routing From the General display you can set various parameters for the Performance. Ins A Ins B Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [General] EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Performance Name Determines the selected Performance name. Performance names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Motion Control Flag Determines whether or not to add the “Motion Control” attribute to the selected Performance. When this is set to on, the “MC” icon is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). The Performance can be filtered as “MC” in the Performance Category Search display (page 176). Settings: Off, On Tg Flag (Tone Generator Flag) Shows the attribute by the Tone Generator of the selected Performance. The name icon of the selected Tone Generator is displayed in the Performance Play display (page 27). The Performance can be filtered as “AWM2/FM/AWM2+FM-X” in the Performance Category Search display (page 176). Settings: AWM2, FM-X, AWM2+FM-X Volume (Performance Volume) Determines the output volume of the selected Performance. Settings: 0–127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Performance. Settings: L63–C–R63 Var Return (Variation Return) Determines the return level of the Variation effect. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 159 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Rev Return (Reverb Return) Determines the return level of the Reverb effect. Settings: 0–127 Audition Phrase Bank Selects an Audition Phrase Bank. Audition Phrase Number Determines the Audition Phrase Number. You can hear a sample of the selected Performance sounds that is called “Audition phrase.” The best matching Audition Phrase is assigned to each Preset Performance in advance. Settings: 1–1093 Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Note Shift (Audition Phrase Note Shift) Common Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for the Audition Phrase in semitones. Lane Settings: -24semi – +24semi Control Velocity Shift (Audition Phrase Velocity Shift) Control Assign Determines the velocity of the Audition Phrase. Control Number Settings: -63 – +63 Effect Portamento Master SW (Portamento Master Switch) Routing Determines whether Portamento is applied to the Part or not when the “Portamento Part SW” is set to on for the Part. Variation Settings: Off, On Master FX Portamento Time Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied. Reverb Master EQ USB Monitor Settings: -64 – +63 Assign 1 Mode/Assign 2 Mode (Assignable Switch 1 Mode/Assignable Switch 2 Mode) Determines whether the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons functions as a latch type or momentary type. Settings: Latch, Momentary Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off. Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off. MS Hold Mode (Motion Sequencer Hold Mode) Determines how the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] button responds when pressed. Settings: Latch, Momentary Latch: When set to “Latch,” pressing the button alternates the status between on and off. Momentary: When set to “Momentary,” pressing/holding the button turns on and releasing the button turns off. Update User Auditions Converts all of the songs recorded on the MODX to User Auditions. If the User Auditions already exist, all User Auditions will be overwritten. MODX Reference Manual 160 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Audio In Common/Audio General Mixing Audio In From the Mixing display you can adjust the volume settings of the Audio Part (the input signal from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks) and the Digital Part (the input signal from the [USB TO HOST] terminal*). Mixing * Only the sound of the Port which, among all Device Ports, is set to “Digital L/R.” Ins A Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Audio In] [Mixing] Routing Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor A/D In Input Mode/Digital In Input Mode (A/D Part Input Mode/Digital Part Input Mode) Determines the signal configuration for the A/D Part/Digital Part, or how the signal or signals are routed (stereo or mono). Settings: L Mono, R Mono, L+R Mono, Stereo L Mono: Only the L channel is used. R Mono: Only the R channel is used. L+R Mono: The L and R channels are mixed and processed in mono. Stereo: Both the L and R channels are used. NOTE The sound input only from the [L/MONO] channel is processed in mono. Volume (A/D Part Volume/Digital Part Volume) Determines the output level of the A/D Part/Digital Part. Settings: 0–127 Pan (A/D Part Pan/Digital Part Pan) Determines the stereo pan position of the A/D Part/Digital Part. Settings: L63–C–R63 Dry Level (A/D Part Dry Level/Digital Part Dry Level) Determines the level of the A/D Part/Digital Part which has not been processed with the System Effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Settings: 0–127 Var Send (A/D Part Variation Send / Digital Part Variation Send) Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R,” and for the A/D Part, “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.” Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 161 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Rev Send (A/D Part Reverb Send/Digital Part Reverb Send) Determines the Send level of the Audio Part/Digital Part signal sent to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R,” and for the A/D Part, “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.” Settings: 0–127 Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Output Select (A/D Part Part Output Select/Digital Part Part Output Select) Determines the specific output(s) for the individual A/D Part/Digital Part signal. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Routing Control From the Routing display you can determine the Effect connections for the A/D Part. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Audio In] [Routing] Control Assign Control Number Effect Insertion FX Switch Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Insertion FX Switch Insertion FX Switch (Insertion Effect Switch) Determines whether the Insertion Effect A/B is active or not. Settings: Off, On Category (Effect Category) Type (Effect Type) Determines the category and type for the selected Effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Preset Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed settings. Settings: For a list of all Preset Effects, see the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 162 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Side Chain/Modulator (Side Chain/Modulator Part) Determines the Part used for the Side Chain/Modulator. This is not available depending on the Effect Type. For details on the Side Chain/Modulator, see the Routing display of the Normal Part (AWM2) (page 76). Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Ins Connect (Insertion Connection Type) Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect connection” (page 20) of the “Basic Structure.” Settings: Ins AB, Ins BA Rev Send (Reverb Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Reverb effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” and “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.” Settings: 0–127 Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Var Send (Variation Send) Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Variation effect. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R” and “Global A/D” is set to “OFF.” Effect Routing Variation Settings: 0–127 Reverb Envelope Follower Master FX Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. For details, see the Routing display (page 76) of Normal Part (AWM2) Edit. This is available only when “Part Output” is set to “MainL&R.” Master EQ USB Monitor Output Select (Part Output Select) Determines specific audio output. Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, AsgnL, USB1…USB8, Off MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Off: No audio signal for the Part is output. Ins A (Insertion Effect A) Ins B (Insertion Effect B) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 77). EQ (Equalizer) Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 78) except that “3-band EQ” is inactive. MODX Reference Manual 163 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Motion Seq (Motion Sequencer) Common/Audio General Common Audio In From the Common display you can set the parameters related to Motion Sequencer commonly used for all Parts in Common/Audio Part. Operation Common/Audio Edit [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Motion Seq] [Common] Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Common Clock Swing (Common Swing) Determines the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Swing of the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer for each Part. Settings: -120 – +120 Common Clock Unit (Common Unit Multiply) Adjusts the Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer playback time for the entire Performance. This parameter is applied to the Part when the Unit Multiply parameter for the Part is set to “Common.” By using this parameter, you can create a different Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer type from the original one. Settings: 50%–400% 200%: The playback time will be doubled and the tempo is halved. 100%: The normal playback time. 50%: The playback time will be halved and the tempo doubled. Common Arp Gate Time (Common Arpeggio Gate Time) Determines the Gate Time Rate (length) of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Gate Time Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part. Settings: -100 – +100 Common Arp Velocity (Common Arpeggio Velocity Rate) Determines the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for the entire Performance. This is the offset value for the Velocity Rate of the Arpeggio for each Part. Settings: -100 – +100 Common Motion Seq Amplitude (Common Motion Sequencer Amplitude) Determines the Amplitude of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Amplitude” determines how the entire Motion Sequence changes. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Amplitude, which is also the offset value for the Lane Amplitude. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Amplitudes offset the Amplitude setting in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Settings: -64 – +63 MODX Reference Manual 164 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common Motion Seq Shape (Common Motion Sequencer Pulse Shape) Determines the Pulse Shape of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. This changes the step curve shape of the sequence. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Pulse Shape, which is also the offset value for the Lane Pulse Shape. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Pulse Shapes offset the Pulse Shape setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane and “Control” is set to on for the parameter). Settings: -100 – +100 Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Mixing Routing Ins A Common Motion Seq Smooth (Common Motion Sequencer Smoothness) Determines the Smoothness of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Smoothness” is the degree to which the time of the Motion Sequence is smoothly changed. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Smoothness, which is also the offset value for the Lane Smoothness. This results in that both of the Common and Part MS Smoothnesses offset the Smoothness setting for the parameter in the Lane (only when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane). Settings: -64 – +63 Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Common Motion Seq Random (Common Motion Sequencer Random) Control Assign Determines the Random of the Motion Sequencer for the entire Performance. “Random” is the degree to which the Step Value of the Sequence is randomly changed. This is the offset value for the Part Motion Seq Random when “MS FX” is set to on for the Lane. Control Number Settings: -64 – +63 Effect Routing Variation Random (A/D Part Motion Sequencer Random) Determines the degree of random change in the Step Value of the Motion Sequence for the A/D Part is. For details about “Random,” see “Quick Edit” on page 38. Settings: 0–127 Sync Part (Motion Sequencer Sync Part) Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Determines the Part for synchronizing to the Motion Sequencer. The Motion Sequencer is synchronized to the Note On setting and the Arp/Motion Seq Grid setting of the specified Part. Settings: Part 1–Part 16 Arp/MS Grid (Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer Grid) Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Quantize or Swing. The parameter value is displayed in clocks. For Motion Sequencer, this parameter value is one step length. This setting is applied to the Part which is selected as the Sync Part (above). Settings: 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Lane Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 91). MODX Reference Manual 165 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Control Common/Audio Control Assign Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Control] [Control Assign] or Touch [Edit Super Knob] in the Super Knob display. Touching the “+” button adds a Part parameter to be used as a control target. General Audio In Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Same as the Element Common Edit parameters for Normal Parts (AWM2) (page 100), except for the following parameters. Destination When “Source” is set to “AsgnKnob 1–8,” “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8” are added as this parameter values. In this case, “Curve Type” and “Curve Ratio” are not selectable. Settings: See the “Control List” in the Data List PDF document. Source When “Destination” is set to “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8,” only “AsgnKnob 1–8” can be set for this parameter. Settings: AsgnKnob 1–8, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst Display Filter Determines the Controller to be displayed. When “Super Knob” is selected, all Assignable Knob settings in which “Super Knob Link” is set to On are displayed. Settings: AsgnKnob 1–8, Super Knob, MS Lane 1–4, EnvFollow 1–16, EnvFollowAD, EnvFollowMst, All The following parameters are displayed only when “Destination 1–16” is set to “Part 1–16 Assign 1–8.” Also, when Destination is not set to any Assignable Knobs for the Part, only the shortcut buttons are available. Destination Determines the controller settings for the Part to be displayed. Settings: 1–16 (The number of Destinations for the Assignable Knobs for the Part which is selected in “Destination 1–16” is displayed.) Parameter Determines the parameters for the Part to be controlled. Settings: Refer to the “Control List” in the Data List. MODX Reference Manual 166 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Edit Part Control Settings Calls up the Control Assign display for the currently selected Part. Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio Curve Type General Determines the specific curve for changing the parameter which is set in “Destination.” The horizontal axis indicates the value of the controller set in “Source” and the vertical axis indicates the parameter values. Audio In Settings: Standard, Sigmoid, Threshold, Bell, Dogleg, FM, AM, M, Discrete Saw, Smooth Saw, Triangle, Square, Trapezoid, Tilt Sine, Bounce, Resonance, Sequence, Hold For User Bank: User 1–32 When a Library file is read: Curves in Library 1–8 Polarity (Curve Polarity) Determines the Curve Polarity of the Curve type set in “Curve Type.” Settings: Uni, Bi Uni: Unipolar changes only in a positive direction or in a negative direction from a base parameter value according to the Curve shape. Bi: Bipolar changes in both of positive and negative directions from a base parameter value. Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Ratio (Curve Ratio) Determines the Curve Ratio. Settings: -64 – +63 Control Number Effect Routing Variation Control Number Determines the MIDI Control Change numbers common for the entire system. You can use the Knobs on the front panel and external controllers by assigning appropriate MIDI Control Change numbers. When the same control number is assigned to the Super Knob and any Assignable Knob, the Super Knob takes priority and operation of the Assignable Knob may be ignored. A warning message appears in that case. Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor NOTE External controllers include external sequencers and external MIDI controllers. NOTE The Control Number set in this display is stored as Performance data. However, “FS Assign,” “Super Knob CC” and “Scene CC” are stored as general system settings, and not as Performance data. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Control] [Control Number] Ribbon Ctrl (Ribbon Controller Control Number) Determines the Control Change Number received from an external device with a Ribbon Controller. Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from an external device, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Ribbon Controller. Settings: Off, 1–95 MODX Reference Manual 167 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Breath Ctrl (Breath Controller Control Number) Determines the Control Change Number received from the external equipment such as a Breath Controller. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Breath Controller. Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Settings: Off, 1–95 Mixing Foot Ctrl 1/Foot Ctrl 2 (Foot Controller 1 Control Number/Foot Controller 2 Control Number) Routing Determines the Control Change Number generated by using a Foot Controller connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER [1] /[2] jack. Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Foot Controller. Ins B Settings: Off, 1–95, Super Knob Assign SW 1/Assign SW 2 (Assignable Switch 1 Control Number/Assignable Switch 2 Control Number) Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button (Assignable Switch 1/2). Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the [ASSIGN 1]/[ASSIGN 2] button (Assignable Switch 1/2.) Ins A EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Settings: Off, 1–95 Reverb MS Hold (Motion Sequencer Hold Control Number) Master FX Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Sequencer Hold) button. Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the [MOTION SEQ HOLD] (Motion Sequencer Hold) button. Master EQ USB Monitor Settings: Off, 1–95 MS Trigger (Motion Sequencer Trigger Control Number) Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion Sequencer Trigger) button. Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the [MOTION SEQ TRIGGER] (Motion Sequencer Trigger) button. Settings: Off, 1–95 Assign Knob 1–8 (Assignable Knob 1–8 Control Number) Determines the Control Change Number generated by using the Assignable Knob 1–8. Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by operating the Assignable Knob 1–8. Settings: Off, 1–95 MIDI Settings Calls up the MIDI I/O display in Utility. MODX Reference Manual 168 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Effect Common/Audio General Routing Audio In From this display you can determine the System Effect and Master Effect connections that commonly affect all Parts. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Routing] Reverb Switch Variation Switch Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Master Effect Switch Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Switch Determines whether Variation/Reverb/Master Effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On Category (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Category) Type (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Type) Determines the category and type for the selected effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Preset (Variation/Reverb/Master Effect Preset) Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Variation/Reverb/Master Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document. Side Chain/Modulator (Variation/Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part) Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation/Master Effect. This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part. Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Var Return (Variation Return) Rev Return (Reverb Return) Determines the return level of the Variation/Reverb effect. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 169 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Var Pan (Variation Pan) Rev Pan (Reverb Pan) Common/Audio Determines the pan position of the Variation/Reverb effect. Settings: L63 (far left)–C (center)–R63 (far right) General Audio In Var to Rev (Variation to Reverb) Mixing Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Variation Effect to the Reverb Effect. Routing Settings: 0–127 Ins A Master EQ (Master Equalizer Switch) Ins B Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not. EQ Settings: Off, On Motion Seq Envelope Follower Common Calls up the Envelope Follower setting display. See the Routing display (page 75) for the Normal Part (AWM2). Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Variation Effect From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Variation effect. Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Variation] Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Variation Switch Master EQ USB Monitor Effect Parameter Variation Switch Determines whether the Variation effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On Category (Variation Category) Type (Variation Type) Determines the category and type for the selected effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Preset (Variation Preset) Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 170 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Side Chain/Modulator (Variation Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part) Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Variation Effect. This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part. Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Live Set Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Effect Parameter Mixing Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Reverb Motion Seq From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Reverb effect. Common Lane Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Reverb] Control Control Assign Reverb Switch Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Effect Parameter Reverb Switch Determines whether the Reverb effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On Category (Reverb Category) Type (Reverb Type) Determines the category and type for the selected effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Preset (Reverb Preset) Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document. Effect Parameter Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 171 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Master FX (Master Effect) Common/Audio From this display you can determine the detailed settings of the Master Effect. Operation Live Set [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Master FX] General Audio In Mixing Routing Master Effect Switch Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Effect Parameter Master Effect Switch Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On Category (Master Effect Category) Type (Master Effect Type) Determines the category and type for the selected effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. Preset (Master Effect Preset) Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. Settings: For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the Data List PDF document. Side Chain/Modulator (Master Effect Side Chain/Modulator Part) Determines the Part used for Side Chain/Modulator for Master Effect. This is not available when you select the same Part or “Master” as the Modulator Part. Settings: Part 1–16, A/D, Master, Off Effect Parameter Editable parameters differ depending on the selected Effect Types. For details on the editable Effect parameters for each Effect Type, see the Data List PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect parameter, see the Synthesizer Parameter Manual PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 172 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Common/Audio Common/Audio Edit Master EQ (Master Equalizer) Common/Audio From this display you can set parameters related to the Master EQ. Operation Live Set General Audio In [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [Effect] [Master EQ] Mixing Routing Master EQ Switch Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Low Shape High Shape Master EQ Switch Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not. Settings: Off, On Low Gain (Master EQ Low Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Lo Mid Gain (Master EQ Low Mid Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Low Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Mid Gain (Master EQ Mid Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Hi Mid Gain (Master EQ High Mid Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High Mid band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB High Gain (Master EQ High Gain) Determines the level gain of the Master EQ High band. Settings: -12dB – +12dB Low Freq (Master EQ Low Frequency) Determines the frequency for the Master Low band. Settings: 32Hz–2.0kHz MODX Reference Manual 173 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio Lo Mid Freq (Master EQ Low Mid Frequency) Determines the frequency for the Master Low Mid band. Settings: 100Hz–10kHz Mid Freq (Master EQ Mid Frequency) Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Determines the frequency for the Master Mid band. Mixing Settings: 100Hz–10kHz Routing Hi Mid Freq (Master EQ High Mid Frequency) Ins A Determines the frequency for the Master High Mid band. Ins B Settings: 100Hz–10kHz EQ High Freq (Master EQ High Frequency) Motion Seq Determines the frequency for the Master High band. Common Settings: 500Hz–16kHz Lane Low Q (Master EQ Low Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low band. This is available only when the Master EQ Low Shape (below) is set to “Peak.” Settings: 0.1–12.0 Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Lo Mid Q (Master EQ Low Mid Q) Routing Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Low Mid band. Variation Settings: 0.1–12.0 Reverb Mid Q (Master EQ Mid Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master Mid band. Settings: 0.1–12.0 Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor Hi Mid Q (Master EQ High Mid Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High Mid band. Settings: 0.1–12.0 High Q (Master EQ High Q) Determines the EQ bandwidth of the Master High band. This is available only when the Master EQ High Shape (below) is set to “Peak.” Settings: 0.1–12.0 Low Shape (Master EQ Low Shape) High Shape (Master EQ High Shape) Determines whether the equalizer type used is Shelving or Peaking. The Peaking type attenuates/boosts the signal at the specified Frequency setting, whereas the Shelving type attenuates/boosts the signal at frequencies above or below the specified Frequency setting. This parameter is available only for the LOW and HIGH frequency bands. Settings: Shelf (Shelving Type), Peak (Peaking Type) MODX Reference Manual 174 Reference Performance Edit Normal Part (AWM2) Search Drum Part Utility Normal Part (FM-X) Live Set Common/Audio USB Monitor From the USB Monitor display, you can adjust the Audio Input level from the [USB TO HOST] terminal. NOTE USB Main Monitor Volume is stored as Performance Data. Common/Audio Edit Common/Audio General Audio In Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] [USB Monitor] Mixing Routing Ins A Ins B EQ Motion Seq Common Lane Control Control Assign Control Number Effect Routing Variation Reverb Master FX Master EQ USB Monitor USB Main Monitor Volume Adjusts the Audio signal level which is input from the [USB TO HOST] terminal and output to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Settings: 0–127 Audio Settings Calls up the Audio I/O display in Utility. MODX Reference Manual 175 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Search Category Search Performance Category The Performances/Arpeggios/Waveforms are conveniently divided into specific Categories. The categories are divided based on the general instrument type or sound characteristics. The Category Search function gives you quick access to the sounds you want. The Favorite function has been added, giving you quick access to desired sounds and Arpeggios. Arp Category Waveform Rhythm Pattern NOTE You can filter the Performance List by Favorite in the Part Category Search and in the Performance Merge, but you cannot turn the Favorite icon on/off from the search displays. Performance Category Search From the Performance Category Search display you can search and select the Performance. In case of Performance Category Search Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [CATEGORY] (Performance Category Search) or Touch the Performance Name Select [Category Search] from the displayed menu Name Search Favorite icon Performance list Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite) Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a Favorite icon are listed. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read) NOTE When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go back to All. Attribute (Performance Attribute) Filters the Performance List by Attribute (page 159). This is not available for Part Category Search. Settings: All, AWM2, FM, AWM2+FM-X, MC, SSS, Single, Multi Name Search (Performance Name Search) Searches the Performance by inputting a part of the Performance Name. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. MODX Reference Manual 176 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Main (Performance Main Category) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Live Set Search Performance Category Sub (Performance Sub Category) Arp Category Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Waveform Audition (Audition Switch) Rhythm Pattern Determines whether the Audition phrase is played back or not. This is not available when “Audition Lock” (page 193) is set to on in the Utility display. Settings: Off, On Sort (Sort Order) Determines the Sort Order of the Performance List. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. Favorite Set / Unset Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not available when the cursor is not on the Performance List. NOTE You can also set/unset the Favorite icon from the menu which is displayed by touching the Performance name on the Performance Play (Home) display. Favorite All Clear Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a Favorite icon. MODX Reference Manual 177 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility In case of Part Category Search You can select any Part in a Performance and assign the sound of the Part to another. When “Mixing” of the “Parameter with Part” (Param. with Part) setting is set to off, you can change sounds continuously, using the current setting values for the Part such as Volume, Pan and Note shift. Live Set Search Performance Category Arp Category Waveform Operation [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] (When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Select the Part Name [SHIFT]+[CATEGORY] (Part Category Search) or (When the Part to which any sounds are assigned is selected) Touch the Part Name Select [Category Search] from the displayed menu Rhythm Pattern When the selected Part and all succeeding Parts have no sound assigned (or are empty), executing the operation above opens the Performance Merge display. Source Determines which Part of the selected Performance will be assigned to the Performance being edited. Settings: Part 1–16 Solo (Solo Switch) Determines the Solo function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this is set to on and any sound is assigned to the Part, only the Part will be sounded. Settings: Off, On Param. with part (Parameter with Part) Determines whether or not to read and use the parameter values for the next Performance. When the set of parameters is set to off, the current setting values are continuously used even when the next Performance is selected. The “Zone” parameter is available only when “Zone Master” (page 193) is set to on in the Utility display. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 178 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Performance Merge From the Performance Merge display, you can collectively assign multiple Parts from the selected Performance to empty Parts in the Performance currently being edited. For example, you can merge four Piano Parts in one Performance and two Strings Parts in another Performance to create even more richly textured, layered sounds. This allows you to separately mute original Parts and newly added Parts. Live Set Search Performance Category Arp Category Waveform Rhythm Pattern [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] (the selected Part and all Parts that follow must not be assigned) [SHIFT] + [CATEGORY] or touch the “+” icon Operation Additional Part Mute Original Part Mute Source Determines which Part of the selected Performance will be assigned to the Performance being edited. Settings: All, Part 1–16 All: All non-empty Parts of the selected Performance are assigned to available empty Parts. Part 1–16: Only the sound from the specified Part is assigned to the selected Part. Original Part Mute When set to OFF, all of the Parts existed before adding any Parts in the Performance Merge display will be muted. Settings: Off, On Additional Part Mute When set to OFF, only the Part added in the Performance Merge display will be muted. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 179 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Arpeggio Category Search (Arp Category Search) From the Arpeggio Category Search display you can search and select Arpeggio Types. Live Set Search Performance Category Arp Category Operation Arpeggio related display Part selection [CATEGORY] Waveform Name Search Favorite icon Rhythm Pattern Arpeggio Type list Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite) Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a Favorite icon are listed. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read) When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go back to All. Name Search (Arpeggio Name Search) Searches for an Arpeggio by inputting a part of the Arpeggio Name. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Main (Arpeggio Category) Settings: See the Arpeggio Category List (page 11). Sub (Arpeggio Sub Category) Settings: See the Arpeggio Sub Category List (page 11). Sort (Sort Order) Determines the Sort Order of the Arpeggio Type List. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts in order of loading. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. Favorite Set / Unset Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not available when the cursor is not on the Performance List. MODX Reference Manual 180 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Favorite All Clear Live Set Search Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a Favorite icon. Performance Category Page (Page Select) Waveform When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. Rhythm Pattern MODX Reference Manual Arp Category 181 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Waveform Category Search (Waveform Search) From the Waveform Category Search display you can search and select the Waveforms. Live Set Search Performance Category Arp Category Operation Waveform related display Part selection Waveform selection [CATEGORY] Name Search Favorite icon Waveform Rhythm Pattern Waveform list Bank/Favorite (Performance Bank Select/Favorite) Filters the Performance List by Bank or Favorite. When Favorite is selected, only Performances having a Favorite icon are listed. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read) When the Category Search display is selected, pressing the [CATEGORY] button repeatedly switches Banks among All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library (when the Library file is read). Holding down the [CATEGORY] button lets you go back to All. Name Search (Waveform Name Search) Searches for a Waveform by inputting a part of the Waveform Name. Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Main (Waveform Category) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Sub (Waveform Sub Category) Settings: See the Data List PDF document. Sort (Sort Order) Determines the Sort Order of the Waveform List. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. Favorite Set / Unset Enters (Sets) or cancels (Unsets) the Favorite icon to the currently selected Performance. This is not available when the cursor is not on the Performance List. MODX Reference Manual 182 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Favorite All Clear Live Set Search Clears all Favorite icons on Performances. This is available only when at least one Performance has a Favorite icon. Performance Category Page (Page Select) Waveform When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. Rhythm Pattern MODX Reference Manual Arp Category 183 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Search Rhythm Pattern Use this function to add and set up a Drum Part. Performance Category Arp Category Operation [RHYTHM PART] Waveform Name Search Rhythm Pattern Rhythm Pattern List Bank/Favorite (Rhythm Pattern Bank Select) Filters the Rhythm Pattern List by Bank or Favorite. Settings: All, Favorite, Preset, User, Library Name (when the Library file is read) Name Search (Rhythm Pattern Name Search) Searches the Rhythm Patterns by inputting a part of the Rhythm Pattern Name. Original Part Mute When set to OFF, all of the Parts existed before adding any Parts in the Rhythm Pattern display will be muted. Settings: Off, On Additional Part Mute When set to OFF, only the Part added in the Rhythm Pattern display will be muted. Settings: Off, On Sort (Sort Order) Determines the Sort Order of the Rhythm Pattern List. Settings: Default, Name, Date Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order. Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. Page (Page Select) When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. Cancel Touching this button or pressing the [RHYTHM PATTERN] button cancels the selection and closes the Rhythm Pattern display. MODX Reference Manual 184 Reference Performance Edit Arpeggio Tab Search Utility Live Set Search Performance Category Arp Category Waveform Rhythm Pattern Arpeggio Tab Arp Category (Arpeggio Category) Arp Sub Category (Arpeggio Sub Category) Arp Name (Arpeggio Name) Arp Select (Arpeggio Select) Same as the Individual display for Arpeggio (page 85). Tempo Determines the Rhythm Part tempo. Settings: 5–300 Volume Determines the Rhythm Part volume. Settings: 0–127 MODX Reference Manual 185 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Envelope Follower Tab Live Set Search Performance Category Arp Category Waveform Rhythm Pattern Envelope Follower Tab Envelope Follower Switch Determines whether the Envelope Follower is used (on) or not (off). Settings: Off, On Envelope Follower Gain Same as the parameter in the Envelope Follower display (page 21). Edit Opens the Envelope Follower setting display. Destination Settings: Volume, Cutoff, Resonance, Pitch, Pan, Reverb Send, Variation Send, LFO Speed, LFO Depth 1, LFO Depth 2, LFO Depth 3 Curve Type Curve Polarity Curve Ratio Same as the parameters in the Control Assign display (page 100). Curve Parameter 1 Curve Parameter 2 Settings: 0–127 NOTE This parameter is not available depending on the Curve Type. MODX Reference Manual 186 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Utility Settings The Utility display has four tabs; the Setting tab, the Contents tab, the Tempo Settings tab, the Effect Switch tab, and the Other Info tab. You can make various settings for the entire system. Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O Settings MIDI I/O Advanced Sound System From the Sound display you can make overall settings for the sounds output from the instrument. Contents Load Operation [UTILITY] [Settings] [Sound] Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Tone Generator Volume Determines the overall volume of the instrument. Settings: 0–127 Tone Generator Note Shift Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted. Settings: -24semi – +24semi Tone Generator Tune Determines the fine tuning of the instrument’s overall sound (in 0.1 cent steps). Settings: -102.4 – +102.3 Sustain Pedal (Foot Switch Sustain Pedal Select) Selects the Foot switch type connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack on the rear panel. • When the FC3 or FC3A is used: When you connect an optional FC3 or FC3A (equipped with the half-damper feature) for producing the special “half-damper” effect (as on a real acoustic piano), set this parameter to “FC3A (Half on).” If you don’t need the half-damper feature or want to disable it while still using an FC3 or FC3A, set this parameter to “FC3A (Half off).” • When the FC4, FC4A, or FC5 is used: Select “FC4A/FC5.” The FC4, FC4A, and FC5 are not equipped with the half-damper feature. Settings: FC3A (Half On), FC3A (Half Off), FC4A/FC5 NOTE Note that this setting is not necessary when controlling the half-damper feature via Control Change messages from an external MIDI device to the instrument. MODX Reference Manual 187 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Keyboard Octave Shift Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This parameter is linked with the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons on the panel. Settings: -3 – +3 Settings Sound Quick Setup Keyboard Transpose Audio I/O This parameter is used to transpose the current zone in units of one semitone. Settings: -11semi – +11semi NOTE If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C -2 – G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used. MIDI I/O Advanced System Keyboard Velocity Curve Contents These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates the velocity response curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your playing), while the vertical line represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external tone generators.) Settings: Normal, Soft, Hard, Wide, Fixed Normal: This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing (velocity) and the actual sound change. Soft: This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities. Hard: This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities. Wide: This curve accentuates your playing strength by producing lower velocities in response to softer playing and louder velocities in response to harder playing. As such, you can use this setting to expand your dynamic range. Fixed: This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Keyboard Fixed Velocity below), no matter what your playing strength. The velocity of the notes you play are fixed at the value set here. Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Keyboard Fixed Velocity The Fixed curve can be used to send a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft you play the keyboard. This parameter is only available if you select the “Fixed” Keyboard Velocity Curve above. Settings: 1–127 Quick Setup Using Quick Setup can instantly call up appropriate sequencer-related panel settings by selecting convenient preset setups, allowing you to simultaneously and instantly set a variety of important sequencer-related parameters. Operation [UTILITY] [Settings] [Quick Setup], or [SHIFT] + [UTILITY], or Touch the QUICK SETUP icon QUICK SETUP icon MODX Reference Manual 188 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Audio Signal Flow Indicates the Audio signal connections. The connections will change depending on the status of the [USB TO HOST] terminal and the general settings of the instrument. Settings Sound MIDI Signal Flow Quick Setup Indicates the MIDI signal connections. The connections will change depending on the general settings of the instrument. Audio I/O Quick Setup Advanced Determines the Quick Setups. System Settings: Standalone, 1–3 MIDI I/O Contents Load The parameters for Quick Setups are as follows. Store / Save A/D Input Gain Audio Settings Data Utility L&R Gain Library Import USB L&R Gain Tempo Settings USB 1–8 Gain Effect Switch Direct Monitor Switch MIDI Settings Other Info MIDI In/Out Local Control Shift Function Arp MIDI Out Legal Notices MIDI Sync Clock Out Receive/Transmit Sequencer Control Controller Reset FS CC Number Super Knob CC Number Scene CC Number Part 1–16 Output Select Part Output Settings A/D In Output Select Digital In Output Select For details about parameters related to Audio Settings, see “Audio I/O” (page 190). For details about parameters related to MIDI Settings, see “MIDI I/O” (page 191). The default settings for Quick Setups are as follows. Standalone Use this setting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other equipment. Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out On On Main L&R Off MIDI Rec on DAW Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance (not including Arpeggio data) to the DAW software. Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out Off On Main L&R Off Arp Rec on DAW Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW software. Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out Off On Main L&R On MODX Reference Manual 189 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Audio Rec on DAW Live Set Uitlity Use this setting when recording the signals from the tone generator and the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks separately to DAW software, and playing the signals from the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks directly. Settings Sound Quick Setup Local Control Direct Monitor Output Select Arp MIDI Out Audio I/O On Off Depends on the Part Off MIDI I/O The Output settings for Individual are as follows. Advanced System Part 1 Output Select Main L&R Part 2 Output Select USB 1&2 -Part 5 Output Select -- -USB 7&8 -- Part 16 Output Select Main L&R A/D In Output Select Main L&R Digital In Output Select Main L&R Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Store Current Settings Legal Notices Stores the edited settings as 1–3 of “QuickSetup.” Audio I/O From the Audio I/O display you can set the parameters related to Audio Input and Output. Operation [UTILITY] [Settings] [Audio I/O] A/D Input (A/D Input Gain) When using the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (Mic) or Line. Settings: Mic, Line Mic: Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone. Line: Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player. NOTE A guitar or bass having active pickups can be directly connected. However, when using passive pickups, connect the instrument via an effect device. MODX Reference Manual 190 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Main L&R (Main L&R Output Gain) Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound USB Main (USB Main L&R Output Gain) Quick Setup Determines the output gain of the Main L&R channel of the [USB TO HOST] terminal. Audio I/O Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB MIDI I/O USB 1-8 (USB 1–8 Output Gain) Advanced Determines the output gain of 1–8 channels of the [USB TO HOST] terminal. System Settings: -6dB, +0dB, +6dB, +12dB Contents Direct Monitor (Direct Monitor Switch) Load Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “Main L&R,” “USB Main” or “USB 1-8” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). When this is set to “on,” the audio signal which is output via the “Main L&R,” “USB Main” or “USB 1-8” channels is also output to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. When the external device is not connected via USB cable, the Direct Monitor Switch is automatically turned on. Store / Save Tempo Settings Settings: Off, On Effect Switch Monitor Volume Opens the USB Monitor setting display (page 175). Data Utility Library Import Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices MIDI I/O From the MIDI I/O display you can set parameters related to MIDI Input and Output. You can control the Super Knob or switch Scenes by Control Change messages. Operation [UTILITY] [Settings] [MIDI I/O] MIDI IN/OUT Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data. Settings: MIDI, USB NOTE The two types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/ receive MIDI data. MIDI Thru Determines whether the MIDI [OUT] terminal will be used as a MIDI Thru terminal or not. Settings: Off, on MODX Reference Manual 191 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Local Control This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing. Normally, this should be set to “on”—since you’ll want to hear the sound of the instrument as you play it. Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will respond to messages received via MIDI. Settings: Off, On Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O Arp MIDI Out (Arpeggio MIDI Out) MIDI I/O Determines whether to output MIDI data of Arpeggio playback or not. Advanced Settings: Off, On System Contents MIDI Sync You can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization here. Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import as the master clock source for other equipment. Tempo Settings MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the Effect Switch external sequencer is to be used as master. A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Other Info Shift Function Clock Out Legal Notices Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted via MIDI or not. Settings: Off, On Receive (Receive Sequencer Control) Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals—start and stop of Song—will be received via MIDI or not. Settings: Off, On Transmit (Transmit Sequencer Control) Determines whether the Sequencer Control signals—start and stop of Song—will be transmitted to MIDI or not. Settings: Off, On Hold/Reset (Controller Hold/Reset) Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller, Knobs, etc.) when switching between Performances. When this is set to “Hold,” the controllers are kept at the current setting. When this is set to “Reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below). Settings: Hold, Reset If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions: Pitch Bend Center Modulation Wheel Minimum Aftertouch Minimum Foot Controller Maximum Foot Switch Off Ribbon Controller Center Breath Controller Maximum Expression Maximum Assignable Switches 1 and 2 Off Motion Sequencer Hold Off Each Lane of Motion Sequencer 0 (minimum) when Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity is set to “Unipolar” 64 (center) when Lane Motion Sequencer Polarity is set to “Bipolar” FS Assign (Foot Switch Assign Control Number) Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Foot switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by using the Foot switch. Settings: Off, 1–95, Arp SW, MS SW, Play/Stop, Live Set+, Live Set-, Oct Reset MODX Reference Manual 192 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Super Knob CC (Super Knob Control Change Number) Determines the Control Change number generated by using the Super Knob. Even when the instrument receives MIDI messages with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by using the Super Knob. When “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to “Multi,” Channel 1 is used for transmitting MIDI data. When “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to “Single,” the channel specified in “MIDI I/O Ch.” is used for transmitting MIDI data. Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O Settings: Off, 1–95 NOTE When this parameter is set to off, MIDI data is transmitted by SysEx (System Exclusive) messages. MIDI I/O Scene CC (Scene Control Change Number) System Determines the Control Change Number generated by switching Scenes. Even when the instrument receives MIDI message with the same Control Change Number specified here from the external equipment, the instrument assumes that the message is generated by switching Scenes. Settings: Off, 1–95 NOTE Scene 1–8 is selected depending on the Control Change value. 0–15: Scene 1, 16–31: Scene 2, 32–47: Scene 3, 48–63: Scene 4, 64–79: Scene 5, 80–95: Scene 6, 96–111: Scene 7, 112–127: Scene 8 NOTE When the same Control Change Number is set to both of the Super Knob Control Change and the Scene Control Change, an exclamation mark (!) is shown before the value. In such a case, changes to Scene Control have priority and changes to the Super Knob Control are ignored. Advanced Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Control Number Shift Function Calls up the Control Number display in the Common/Audio Edit. Legal Notices Advanced From the Advanced display you can set the advanced parameters. Data communication between this instrument and an external device using only the specified MIDI channel is also available. Operation [UTILITY] [Settings] [Advanced] Zone Master (Zone Master Switch) Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). Settings: Off, On Audition Lock Determines whether the Audition Lock is active or not. When this is set to On, the Audition function is not available. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 193 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility MIDI I/O Mode Determines which MIDI I/O mode is used for data communication between this instrument and an external device. Settings: Multi, Single Multi: Transmits MIDI data such as Note On/Off messages for each Part. Single: Transmits MIDI data using only the channel specified in “MIDI I/O Ch.” MIDI I/O Ch. (MIDI I/O channel) Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O MIDI I/O Determines the MIDI channel to be used for data communication when “MIDI I/O Mode” is set to “Single.” Advanced Settings: Ch1–16 System When this parameter is set to “Single,” Arpeggio data is not transmitted to the external device. When the Zone function is active, the Zone setting for the Performance is given priority over the “MIDI I/O Mode” setting. You can see which setting is active from the MIDI Signal Flow in the MIDI I/O display. Contents Load Store / Save Device Number Determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other System Exclusive messages. Settings: 1–16, All, Off Bank Select This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages. Settings: Off, On Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Pgm Change (Program Change) This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages. Settings: Off, On Receive Bulk Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received. Settings: Protect (not received), On (received) Bulk Interval Determines the interval time of the Bulk Dump transmission when a Bulk Dump Request is received. Settings: 0ms–900ms Event Chase (Song Event Chase) Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward and rewind operations. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even when fast forwarding or rewinding. Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change+Pitch Bend+Control Change) Init On Boot (Initialize User Data on Boot-up) Determines whether the User Data is initialized (On) or not (Off) when the power of the instrument is turned on. Settings: Off, On Initialize Advanced Settings Initializes the system settings edited in the Advanced display. NOTICE When the Initialize operation is executed, the target data and system settings you edited will be erased. Make sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash drive before executing this procedure. MODX Reference Manual 194 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity System Settings From the System display you can make global system settings for the instrument. Operation [UTILITY] [Settings] [System] Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O MIDI I/O Advanced System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices MODX Firmware version Power on Mode Determines the start-up display (which is automatically called up when power is turned on). Settings: Perform, Live Set Auto Power Off To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. This parameter determines the amount of time that elapses before the power is automatically turned off. Settings: Off, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 120min Initial Live Set Bank Initial Live Set Page Initial Live Set Slot Selects the Live Set Bank, Page and Slot for the start-up display, for when the Power on Mode is set to “Live Set.” Settings: Bank: Preset, User1–User8, Library1–Library8 Page: 1–16 Slot: 1–16 Set Current Slot Sets the currently selected Live Set Bank, Page and Slot to be displayed at startup. Animation (Animation Switch) Determines whether the animation of screen transition is turned on or off. Settings: Off, On Blur (Blur Switch) When any display is selected, the display previously selected is blurred. This parameter determines whether the Blur function is turned on or off. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 195 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Beep (Beep Switch) Determines whether the beep sound (that confirms operations, menu/parameter selection, etc.) is turned on or off. Settings: Off, On Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch) Determines whether the flashing function of the Super Knob is turned on or off. Settings: Off, On KnobBrightness (Knob Brightness) Controls the brightness of the lighting of the Super Knob. Settings: 0–128 Audio I/O MIDI I/O Advanced System Contents Load Half Glow (LED Half Glow Brightness) Store / Save Controls the dimming of the button lamps. Data Utility Settings: Off, 1/4, 1/2 Library Import Calibrate Touch Panel Tempo Settings Calls up the Calibration display for the Touch Panel. Calibration of the touch panel may be necessary if the touch panel does not respond correctly. Effect Switch Other Info Initialize All Settings Shift Function Initializes all system settings you created on the Utility display. Legal Notices Initialize User Data Initializes User data (Performance, Motion Sequence, and Live Set) in the specified area of User memory. Initialize All Data Initializes all User data in the User memory and all system settings you created on the Utility display. NOTICE When the Initialize operation is executed, all target data and system settings you created will be erased. Make sure you are not overwriting any important data. Be sure to save all important data to your USB flash drive before executing this procedure. MODX Firmware Version Shows the version of the firmware installed on your MODX. Live Set Font (Live Set Font Size) Determines the font size of the contents name on the Live Set display and the Category Search display. Settings: Normal, Large Live Set display • Normal MODX Reference Manual 196 Reference Performance • Large Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O MIDI I/O Advanced System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Category Search display Shift Function Legal Notices • Normal • Large MODX Reference Manual 197 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Contents Settings Sound Load Quick Setup Audio I/O From the Load display you can load files and data. MIDI I/O Operation [UTILITY] [Contents] [Load] Advanced Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Free Storage System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Folder/File select Import Option Content Type Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a USB flash drive or this instrument, you can load all of them to this synthesizer at once or only a specific, desired type of data. This parameter determines which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. The editable parameters differ depending on how you arrive at this display. Settings: The file types which can be loaded as follows. File Types Device Type Extension Description User File File .X8U .X7U Files of the “User File” type saved to USB flash drive can be loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the User Memory of the instrument (page 23). User File Type data is as follows. • Performance • Arpeggio • Motion Sequence • Curve • Live Set • Micro Tuning • Waveform • Utility settings • Quick Setup • Audition Library File File .X8L .X7L Files of the “Library File” type saved to USB flash drive can be loaded and restored to the dedicated area in the User Memory of the instrument (page 23). Library File Type data is as follows. • Performance • Arpeggio • Motion Sequence • Curve • Live Set • Micro Tuning • Waveform • Audition MODX Reference Manual 198 Reference Performance Edit File Types Device Type Extension Description Backup File File Song&Perf Song .X8A Internal data Internal data Search Utility Data that is saved to USB flash drive as a backup file can be loaded to the User Memory again. A backup file includes all User data, Library data, and Song data. MIDI I/O .MID Standard MIDI File (SMF in format 0, 1) data that is saved to USB flash drive can be loaded and played back. .wav File File .WAV Audio data (Wave File) that is saved to USB flash drive can be loaded and played back. Motion Seq* Internal data Sound A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in the User Memory as a “Song” type can be individually selected and loaded (played back) to the instrument. Both of MIDI sequence and Performance data can be loaded. A specified Song in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in the User Memory as a “Song” type can be individually selected and loaded (played back) to the instrument. Only MIDI sequence data can be loaded. .WAV .AIF Settings Quick Setup File File Uitlity NOTE .X7A format (MONTAGE backup files) is not supported. .mid File Audio File* Live Set Audio data (Wave File and AIFF File) that is saved to USB flash drive can be loaded and as “Waveform.” Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element selection [Osc/Tune] “New Waveform” Audio I/O Advanced System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices A specified Sequence data in a file that is saved to the dedicated area in the User Memory as an “Motion Seq” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [Motion Seq] [Lane] “Load Sequence” NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display. Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Indicates the Parent Folder name and the current selected Folder Name. Once you touch the Parent Folder Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder. Free Storage Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending on the Content Type. Folder/File Select Indicates Folders/Files in the selected Folder. Sort (Sort Order) Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.” Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order. Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for “Motion Seq,” “Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files. Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for “Motion Seq,” “Song,” and “Song&Perf” type Files. Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Song” and “Song&Perf” type Files. Import Option With the MOTIF XF, MOTIF, XS, or MOXF files, you can set the file to be loaded as Performance or Voice. Settings: Voice, Perf Page (Page Select) When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. MODX Reference Manual 199 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Job (Job Switch) Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.” Settings Sound Quick Setup Settings: Off, On Audio I/O MIDI I/O Compatible with the MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/MONTAGE8 data Advanced The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MONTAGE6/MONTAGE7/ MONTAGE8 data. Note that .X7U files are loaded only as “User Files” and that .7L files are loaded only as “Library Files.” Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file. System Contents Load Store / Save NOTE The .X7A format (MONTAGE backup files) is not supported. File Type on MONTAGE Extension on MONTAGE Contents User File .X7U User File Library File .X7L Library File Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Compatible with the MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF XF8 data The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOTIF XF6/MOTIF XF7/MOTIF XF8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.” Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file. File Type on MOTIF XF Extension on MOTIF XF Contents All .X3A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform AllVoice (All Voice) .X3V User Voice, User Waveform AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X3G User Arpeggio AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X3W User Waveform Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Compatible with the MOTIF XS6/MOTIF XS7/MOTIF XS8 data The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOTIF XS6/MOTIF XS7/MOTIF XS8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.” Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file. File Type on MOTIF XS Extension on MOTIF XS Contents All .X0A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform AllVoice (All Voice) .X0V User Voice, User Waveform AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X0G User Arpeggio AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X0W User Waveform0 Compatible with the MOXF6/MOXF8 data The following data can be loaded to MODX6/MODX7/MODX8 among all MOXF6/MOXF8 data. Please note that the data is loaded as “User File” or “Library File.” Also you can switch the Content Type between User file and Library file. File Type on MOXF Extension on MOXF Contents All .X6A User Voice, User Arpeggio, User Waveform AllVoice (All Voice) .X6V User Voice, User Waveform AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X6G User Arpeggio AllWaveform (All Waveform) .X6W User Waveform MODX Reference Manual 200 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Store/Save Settings From the Store/Save display you can store Files and data. Operation Sound Quick Setup Press the [STORE] button or [UTILITY] [Contents] [Store / Save] Parent Folder Name Audio I/O MIDI I/O Current Folder Name Free Storage Advanced System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices File select Content Type You can store all data or the specified data to the instrument or USB flash drive. This parameter determines which specific data will be stored/saved. The editable setting value differs depending on how you arrive at this display. Settings: The Content Types which can be stored/saved are as follows. File Types Device Type Extension Description Performance Internal data User File File .X8U Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory can be saved to USB flash drive. Data saved as “User File” is as follows. • Performance • Arpeggio • Motion Sequence • Curve • Live Set • Micro Tuning • Waveform • Utility Settings • Quick Setup • Audition Library File File .X8L Data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory can be saved to USB flash drive. Data saved as “Library File” is as follows. • Performance • Arpeggio • Motion Sequence • Curve • Live Set • Micro Tuning • Waveform • Audition MODX Reference Manual Data can be stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory as a “Performance” (page 23). 201 Reference Performance Edit File Types Device Type Extension Description Backup File File .mid File Motion Seq* File .X8A .MID Internal data Search Utility Data that is saved to USB flash drive as a backup file can be loaded to the User Memory again. A backup file includes all User data, Library data, and Song data. Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup MIDI data that is stored to the dedicated area in the User Memory (page 23) can be saved as a Standard MIDI File (only Format 0 SMF) to USB flash drive. Audio I/O Data can be stored as “Motion Seq” to the dedicated area in the User Memory. Example: [PERFORMANCE (HOME)] [EDIT] Part selection Element/Operator [Common] [Motion Seq] [Lane] “Edit Sequence” to call up “Motion Sequence Edit” “Store Sequence” Advanced NOTE Files with an asterisk (*) are not displayed when you call up this display from the Utility display. Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Once you touch the Parent Folder Name, the Folder becomes the currently selected folder. Free Storage Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending on the Content Type. MIDI I/O System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Folder/File Select Indicates folders/files in the selected folder. Sort (Sort Order) Determines the sort order of the files in “File Select.” Settings: Name, Size, Date Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the list is arranged in descending order. Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to big.) When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is not available for “Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files. Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is available only for “Performance” and “Motion Seq” type files. Page (Page Select) When files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. Job (Job Switch) Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off.) When this parameter is turned on, touching the File/Folder/Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” Touching the currently connected USB device calls up the menu to select “Format.” Also you can create a new folder when storing a file. Settings: Off, On MODX Reference Manual 202 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Data Utility Settings From the Data Utility display you can control Files and data in the User Memory. Also, you can collectively delete multiple contents such as Performances in the User Memory. Operation Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O [UTILITY] [Contents] [Data Utility] MIDI I/O Folder List Advanced Current Folder Name System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Folder select Current Folder Name Indicates the Current Folder Name. Job (Job Switch) Determines whether the Job function is active (On) or not (Off). This parameter is available only for the “Waveform” folder on this display. When the parameter is turned on, touching “Waveform” folder calls up the menu to select “Optimize.” When this function is active, you can select multiple contents collectively from this display. Settings: Off, On Folder Select Indicates the Content Types in the User Memory as folders. Touching the Folder opens it. • Arp (Arpeggio) • Library • Live Set • Motion Seq • Performance • Song • Waveform Page (Page Select) When folders in “Folder Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. MODX Reference Manual 203 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility When the selected Folder is opened Uitlity When this function is active, you can select multiple contents collectively from this display. Parent Folder Name Live Set Current Folder Name Free Storage Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O MIDI I/O Advanced System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices File Select Parent Folder Name Current Folder Name Indicates the parent folder name and the current selected folder name. Touching the parent folder name returns to the folder list view. Free Storage Indicates the free space and the full space of the selected storage area. This parameter differs depending on the Content Type. This parameter is displayed only when “Job” is set to OFF. File Select Indicates Files in the selected Folder. The Job function is always available in this display. Touching the File/ Content in “File Select” calls up the menu to select “Rename” or “Delete.” (“Rename” is not available for the Files in “Library” type Folder.) Sort (Sort Order) Determines the Sort Order of the Files in “File Select.” Settings: Name, Size, Date, Number Name: Sorts by name. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (A to Z). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order. Size: Sorts in order of data size. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order (small to large). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in opposite order. This is available only for “Library” type Contents. Date: Sorts in order of storing. When the lower arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in descending order (newer to older). When the upper arrow is displayed, the List is arranged in ascending order. This is not available for “Arp” and “Library” type Contents. Number: Sorts in order of Content Number. This is available only for “Arp,” “Song,” and “Waveform” type Contents. Select All Selects all contents in the folder. This button is displayed only when no content is selected. Unselect All Unselects all contents in the folder. This button is displayed only when any of contents is selected. Delete Deletes the selected content(s). This button is displayed only when any of contents is selected. MODX Reference Manual 204 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Page (Page Select) When Files in “File Select” are displayed in multiple pages, you will need to use this button to scroll through the pages. Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O Library Import MIDI I/O You can select a desired Performance in the Library file which is loaded to the User Memory and copy the Performance to the User Bank. Advanced System Operation [UTILITY] [Contents] [Library Import] Contents Load Library Folder List Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Library Folder Select Library Folder Select Indicates the Libraries as folders. Touching the Folder opens it. These folders are displayed only when Library files are loaded in the Load display. MODX Reference Manual 205 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility When the selected Library Folder is opened Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O MIDI I/O Advanced System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Performance Select Performance Select Indicates the Performances in the selected Library. Touching the name switches between being selected or unselected. Select All Selects all Performances in the selected Library folder. This button is displayed only when no Performance is selected. Unselect All Unselects all Performances in the Library folder. This button is displayed only when any of Performances is selected. Import to User Bank Copies the selected Performance in the User Bank. User Waveforms and User Arpeggio which are used in the selected Performance are copied to the User Bank as well. This button is displayed only when any of the Performances is selected. MODX Reference Manual 206 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Tempo Settings Settings From the Tempo Settings display you can set parameters related to Tempo and Synchronization. Sound Quick Setup Operation [UTILITY] [Tempo Settings] or [SHIFT] + [ENTER] or Touch the TEMPO SETTING icon Audio I/O MIDI I/O Advanced System TEMPO SETTING icon Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Tempo Determines the Performance tempo. This parameter is not available when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI” or “A/D In” and the instrument is synchronized to an external device (“EX. Tempo” is displayed instead of the setting value.) Settings: 5–300 Knob Flash (Super Knob LED Switch) Determines whether the flashing of the Super Knob is turned on or off. Settings: Off, On Global Tempo (Global Tempo Switch) When this switch is set to OFF, the tempo setting changes when a different Performance is selected. When this switch is set to ON, the current tempo is used for all Performances. Settings: Off, On Tap Tempo Allows you to tap the desired tempo by touching this parameter or by moving the cursor to this parameter and pressing (tapping) the [ENTER] button on the panel. This parameter is not displayed when the “MIDI Sync” is set to “MIDI” and the instrument is synchronized to an external device. NOTE When “MIDI Sync” is set to “A/D In,” the tempo search starts by touching this parameter. MODX Reference Manual 207 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility MIDI Sync Determines parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization. Determines whether Arpeggio/Motion Sequencer/Song playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s internal clock, an external MIDI clock, or the Audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Settings: Internal, MIDI, A/D In Internal: Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other equipment. MIDI: Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O MIDI I/O external sequencer is to be used as master. Advanced A/D In: Synchronization to the tempo of the Audio signal received via the A/D INPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. System Clock Out Contents Determines whether MIDI clock messages will be transmitted or not. Load Settings: Off, On Store / Save Mode (Click Mode) Determines the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback. Settings: Off, Rec, Rec/Play, Always Off: The click will not sound. Rec: The click will sound during Song recording only. Rec/Play: The click will sound during Song recording and playback. Always: The click will always sound. Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Precount (Click Pre-count) Determines the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the [R] (Play) button while the Song recording. Settings: Off (Recording starts as soon as the [R] (Play) button is pressed), 1meas–8meas NOTE Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall polyphony of the instrument. Volume (Click Volume) Determines the click sound volume. Settings: 0–127 Beat (Click Beat) Determines which beats the metronome click will sound. Settings: 1/16 (16th notes), 1/8 (8th notes), 1/4 (quarter notes), 1/2 (half notes), Whole (whole notes) Type (Click Type) Determines the click sound type. Settings: 1–10 Sync Quantize (Sync Quantize Value) Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the Arpeggio of multiple Parts is played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you trigger it. The displayed number indicates the resolution in clocks. Settings: Off, 60 (32nd note), 80 (16th note triplet), 120 (16th note), 160 (8th note triplet), 240 (8th note), 320 (1/4 note triplet), 480 (1/4 note) Click Out (Click Output Select) Determines the specified output for the “Click.” Settings: MainL&R, USB1&2…USB7&8, USB1…USB8 MainL&R: Outputs in stereo (two channels) to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. USB1&2…USB7&8: Outputs in stereo (Channels 1&2–7&8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. USB1…USB8: Outputs in mono (Channels 1–8) to the [USB TO HOST] terminal. MODX Reference Manual 208 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Effect Switch Settings From the Effect Switch display you can make Effect Bypass settings. None of the settings made on this display will be stored. When the instrument is restarted, the parameter values are also initialized. Operation Sound Quick Setup Audio I/O [UTILITY] [Effect Switch] or Touch the EFFECT icon MIDI I/O Advanced EFFECT icon System Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices Insertion FX (Insertion Effect Switch) Determines whether the Insertion Effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On System FX (System Effect Switch) Determines whether the System Effect is active or not. Settings: Off, On Master FX (Master Effect Switch) Determines whether the Master Effect is active or not. This parameter is automatically switched off when Global A/D is ON, and switched on when Global A/D is OFF. Set this switch manually when needed. Settings: Off, On Master EQ Switch Determines whether the Master EQ is active or not. This parameter is automatically switched OFF when Global A/D is set to ON, and switched ON when Global A/D is set to OFF. Set this switch manually when needed. The Master EQ Switch settings are not stored. Settings: Off, On Arp Bypass (Arpeggio Bypass Switch) Determines whether the Arpeggio Bypass is active or not. When this is set to on, all Arpeggiator operations are disabled. Settings: Off, On NOTE Arpeggio Bypass can also be turned on/off by simultaneously holding down the [SHIFT] button and using the [ARP ON/OFF] button. The [ARP ON/OFF] button flashes when Arpeggio Bypass is turned on. NOTE When the Part Arpeggio Switch setting is changed, Arpeggio Bypass is automatically turned off even if it has been set to on. NOTE You can edit arpeggios in Song data generated by the arpeggiator with using DAW software. By turning Arpeggio Bypass on, you can prevent Song data edited on the DAW software from being affected again by the arpeggiator when routed back to the MODX. MODX Reference Manual 209 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Kbd Ctrl Lock (Keyboard Control Lock) Determines whether Keyboard Control Lock is active or not. When this is set to on, the Keyboard Control is turned on only for Part 1 and off for the other Parts. When this is set to off, Keyboard Control settings for all Parts are returned to the original status. Live Set Uitlity Settings Sound Settings: Off, On NOTE When you use the MODX as a 16-part multi-timbral sound module with DAW software, the Keyboard Control Lock function is useful for creating or editing MIDI tracks one by one. Quick Setup Global A/D Advanced Determines whether the volume for the A/D Part changes when you switch the Performances. When this parameter is ON, the volume for the A/D Part stays the same, and other parameters related to the A/D Part do not change. When set to OFF, the volume changes according to the volume set in each Performance, and other parameters related to the A/D Part change accordingly. The Global A/D settings are not stored. System Settings: Off, On Audio I/O MIDI I/O Contents Load Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices MODX Reference Manual 210 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Uitlity Other Info Shows other information. Settings Sound Quick Setup Shift Function Audio I/O MIDI I/O Shows the Shift Function List. Advanced System Legal Notices Contents Load Shows legal notices such as the GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE. Store / Save Data Utility Library Import Tempo Settings Effect Switch Other Info Shift Function Legal Notices MODX Reference Manual 211 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Live Set Live Set Live Set Live Set is a list in which Performances can be freely arranged. Up to 16 Performances can be selected from the Preset Live Sets and arranged over a single page—making it easy to call up and play your favorite Performances. For basic instructions on Live Set, see the Owner’s Manual. Edit Register Live Set From the Live Set display you can call up the registered Performances. Operation Press the [LIVE SET] button, or Touch the LIVE SET icon Performance List Current Performance Name LIVE SET icon Current Slot Name Performance Attribute Bank (Live Set Bank Select) Determines the Live Set Bank. Settings: Preset, User 1–8 (default), Library Name (when the Library file is read) Page (Live Set Page Select) Determines the Live Set Page. Settings: Live Set page 1–16 (default) Performance List Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set. Category Search Calls up the Performance Category Search display (page 176). Current Performance Name Indicates the selected Performance Name registered in the selected slot. Current Slot Name Indicates the selected Slot Name. Performance Attribute Indicates the Performance Attribute registered in the selected Slot. MODX Reference Manual 212 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Edit (Edit) From the Live Set Edit display you can edit the Live Sets (User Bank only). Live Set Live Set Live Set Edit Operation [LIVE SET] User Bank selection [EDIT] Register When the Slot to which a Performance has been registered is selected Performance List Bank (Live Set Bank Name) Enters the desired name for the selected Live Set Bank. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Page (Live Set Page Name) Enters the desired name of the selected Live Set Page. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Done Touching this parameter finishes the Live Set Editing and returns to the Live Set display. Performance List Indicates the Performances registered in the selected Live Set. Delete Deletes the Performance from the selected Slot. Slot Name Enters the desired name of the selected Slot. The names can contain up to 20 characters. Touching the parameter calls up the input character display. Performance (Performance Name) Indicates the Performance Name in the selected Slot. Color Determines the Color of the selected Slot. Settings: Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Azure, Pink, Orange, Purple, Sakura, Cream, Lime, Aqua, Beige, Mint, Lilac Volume Determines the volume of the Performance in the selected Slot. MODX Reference Manual 213 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Swap (Swap Switch) Determines whether the Swap function is turned on or off. You can switch settings between Slots. For instructions on the Swap function, see the Owner’s Manual. Settings: Off, On Live Set Live Set Live Set Edit Register Copy (Copy Switch) Determines whether the Copy function is turned on or off. You can copy the setting to another Slot. Settings: Off, On When an empty Slot is selected MODX Reference Manual 214 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Copying or Exchanging Live Sets Live Set Live Set You can copy (or exchange) between Live Sets on a Bank or page basis. NOTE Live Set Edit Page copy (or exchange) between different Banks cannot be executed. Register Operation [LIVE SET] User Bank selection [EDIT] Select Bank/Page to be copied [SHIFT] + [EDIT] 1 3 2 4 Copy Touching this button activates the Bank/Page Copy function. Exchange Touching this button activates the Bank/Page Exchange function. 1 Bank to be copied (or exchanged) NOTE The currently selected Part is set automatically and this setting cannot be changed. 2 Page to be copied (or exchanged) 3 Copy (or exchange) destination Bank 4 Copy (or exchange) destination Page MODX Reference Manual 215 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set Register (Register) From the Live Set Register display you can register Performances to the Live Set. For basic instructions on Live Set Registering, see the Owner’s Manual. Operation Live Set Live Set Live Set Edit Register [SHIFT] + [LIVE SET] (from any operation displays, other than Live Set) Slot Select Bank (Live Set Bank Select) Determines the Live Set Bank for registering Performances. Preset Bank and Library Bank cannot be selected for this parameter. Settings: User 1–8 (default) Page (Live Set Page Select) Determines the Live Set Page for registering Performances. Settings: Live Set Page 1–16 (default) Slot Select Determines the Slot for registering Performance. When the Slot containing the Performance is selected and press the [ENTER] button (or touch the Slot again on the display), the Performance in the slot is replaced with the currently selected Performance. Settings: Slot 1–16 MODX Reference Manual 216 Reference Performance Edit Search Utility Live Set iPhone/iPad connection Connecting an iPhone or iPad NOTE In order to eliminate the risk of noise from other communication when using this instrument with an iPad or iPhone app, be sure to turn on Airplane Mode and then turn on Wi-Fi. NOTICE Be sure to place your iPad or iPhone on a stable surface to prevent it from falling over and being damaged. Apps compatible with the MODX provide many more convenient, enjoyable ways to use this musical instrument. For details on how to connect the devices, refer to the “iPhone/iPad Connection Manual,” which is available from the Yamaha web site. NOTE For audio signal transfer, refer to the connection using Lightning to USB Camera Adapter. Details of compatible smart devices and apps can be found on the following page from the Yamaha web site. http://www.yamaha.com/kbdapps/ Manual Development Department © 2018 Yamaha Corporation Published 03/2018 MW-A0 MODX Reference Manual 217
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Encryption : Standard V4.4 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Print high-res Author : Manual Development Group, Yamaha Corporation Create Date : 2018:03:06 13:51:21Z Modify Date : 2018:05:17 10:44:08+09:00 XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 84.159810, 2016/09/10-02:41:30 Creator Tool : FrameMaker 9.0 Metadata Date : 2018:05:17 10:44:08+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : MODX Reference Manual Creator : Manual Development Group, Yamaha Corporation Producer : Acrobat Distiller 18.0 (Windows) Document ID : uuid:90a8e5e5-ce36-46b3-9827-903562c096f1 Instance ID : uuid:1456b7b2-c147-4d73-8678-8c1b3378eb9c Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 217EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools